advertisement
VSG1432-B101 Series
802.11n Wireless VDSL2 4-port Gateway
Default Login Details
IP Address
User Name
Password http://192.168.1.1
admin
1234
Firmware Version 1.10
Edition 1, 11/2010 www.zyxel.com
www.zyxel.com
Copyright © 2010
ZyXEL Communications Corporation
About This User's Guide
About This User's Guide
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for people who want to configure the ZyXEL Device using the web configurator. You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP/IP networking concepts and topology.
Related Documentation
• Quick Start Guide
The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away. It contains information on setting up your network and configuring for Internet access.
• Support Disc
Refer to the included CD for support documents.
• ZyXEL Web Site
Please refer to www.zyxel.com for additional support documentation and product certifications.
Documentation Feedback
Send your comments, questions or suggestions to: [email protected]
Thank you!
The Technical Writing Team, ZyXEL Communications Corp.,
6 Innovation Road II, Science-Based Industrial Park, Hsinchu, 30099, Taiwan.
Need More Help?
More help is available at www.zyxel.com.
3
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
4
About This User's Guide
• Download Library
Search for the latest product updates and documentation from this link. Read the Tech Doc Overview to find out how to efficiently use the User Guide, Quick
Start Guide and Command Line Interface Reference Guide in order to better understand how to use your product.
• Knowledge Base
If you have a specific question about your product, the answer may be here.
This is a collection of answers to previously asked questions about ZyXEL products.
• Forum
This contains discussions on ZyXEL products. Learn from others who use ZyXEL products and share your experiences as well.
Customer Support
In the event of problems that cannot be solved by using this manual, you should contact your vendor. If you cannot contact your vendor, then contact a ZyXEL office for the region in which you bought the device. See http://www.zyxel.com/ web/contact_us.php for contact information. Please have the following information ready when you contact an office.
• Product model and serial number.
• Warranty Information.
• Date that you received your device.
• Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it.
Disclaimer
Graphics in this book may differ slightly from the product due to differences in operating systems, operating system versions, or if you installed updated firmware/software for your device. Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Document Conventions
Document Conventions
Warnings and Notes
These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User’s Guide.
Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device.
Note: Notes tell you other important information (for example, other things you may need to configure or helpful tips) or recommendations.
Syntax Conventions
• The VSG1432-B101 may be referred to as the “ZyXEL Device”, the “device”, the
“system” or the “product” in this User’s Guide.
• Product labels, screen names, field labels and field choices are all in bold font.
• A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text, for example,
[ENTER] means the “enter” or “return” key on your keyboard.
• “Enter” means for you to type one or more characters and then press the
[ENTER] key. “Select” or “choose” means for you to use one of the predefined choices.
• A right angle bracket ( > ) within a screen name denotes a mouse click. For example, Maintenance > Log > Log Setting means you first click
Maintenance in the navigation panel, then the Log sub menu and finally the
Log Setting tab to get to that screen.
• Units of measurement may denote the “metric” value or the “scientific” value.
For example, “k” for kilo may denote “1000” or “1024”, “M” for mega may denote “1000000” or “1048576” and so on.
• “e.g.,” is a shorthand for “for instance”, and “i.e.,” means “that is” or “in other words”.
5
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Document Conventions
Icons Used in Figures
Figures in this User’s Guide may use the following generic icons. The ZyXEL Device icon is not an exact representation of your device.
ZyXEL Device Computer Notebook computer
Telephone Server
Router
Firewall
Switch
6
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Safety Warnings
Safety Warnings
• Do NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.
• Do NOT expose your device to dampness, dust or corrosive liquids.
• Do NOT store things on the device.
• Do NOT install, use, or service this device during a thunderstorm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device.
• Do NOT open the device or unit. Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks. ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device. Please contact your vendor for further information.
• Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports.
• Place connecting cables carefully so that no one will step on them or stumble over them.
• Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling.
• Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device.
• Connect the power adaptor or cord to the right supply voltage (for example, 110V AC in
North America or 230V AC in Europe).
• Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord.
• Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution.
• If the power adaptor or cord is damaged, remove it from the device and the power source.
• Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord. Contact your local vendor to order a new one.
• Do not use the device outside, and make sure all the connections are indoors. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
• Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots, as insufficient airflow may harm your device.
• Use only No. 26 AWG (American Wire Gauge) or larger telecommunication line cord.
• Antenna Warning! This device meets ETSI and FCC certification requirements when using the included antenna(s). Only use the included antenna(s).
Your product is marked with this symbol, which is known as the WEEE mark. WEEE stands for Waste Electronics and Electrical Equipment. It means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general waste. Used electrical and electronic equipment should be treated separately.
7
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Safety Warnings
8
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Contents Overview
Contents Overview
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
9
Contents Overview
10
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
11
Table of Contents
Part II: Technical Reference .................................................................. 67
12
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Table of Contents
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
13
Table of Contents
14
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Table of Contents
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
15
Table of Contents
16
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Table of Contents
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
17
Table of Contents
18
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Table of Contents
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
19
Table of Contents
20
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
P
ART
I
User’s Guide
21
22
C H A P T E R 1
Introducing the VSG1432-B101
1.1 Overview
The VSG1432-B101 is a wireless VDSL router and Gigabit Ethernet gateway. It has a DSL port and a Gigabit Ethernet port for super-fast Internet access over analog
(POTS) telephone lines. The ZyXEL Device supports both Packet Transfer Mode
(PTM) and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM). It is backward compatible with
ADSL, ADSL2 and ADSL2+ in case VDSL is not available.
Only use firmware for your ZyXEL Device’s specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your ZyXEL Device.
The ZyXEL Device has a a USB port used to share files via a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive.
See Chapter 35 on page 315 for a full list of features.
1.2 Ways to Manage the ZyXEL Device
Use any of the following methods to manage the ZyXEL Device.
• Web Configurator. This is recommended for everyday management of the ZyXEL
Device using a (supported) web browser.
• TR-069. This is an auto-configuration server used to remotely configure your device.
1.3 Good Habits for Managing the ZyXEL Device
Do the following things regularly to make the ZyXEL Device more secure and to manage the ZyXEL Device more effectively.
• Change the password. Use a password that’s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters, such as numbers and letters.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
23
Chapter 1 Introducing the VSG1432-B101
• Write down the password and put it in a safe place.
• Back up the configuration (and make sure you know how to restore it).
Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes. If you forget your password, you will have to reset the
ZyXEL Device to its factory default settings. If you backed up an earlier configuration file, you would not have to totally re-configure the ZyXEL Device.
You could simply restore your last configuration.
1.4 Applications for the ZyXEL Device
Here are some example uses for which the ZyXEL Device is well suited.
1.4.1 Internet Access
Your ZyXEL Device provides shared Internet access by connecting the DSL port to the DSL or MODEM jack on a splitter or your telephone jack. You can have up to five WAN services over one ADSL, VDSL or Ethernet WAN line. The ZyXEL Device cannot work in ADSL, VDSL and Ethernet WAN mode at the same time.
Note: The ADSL, VDSL and Ethernet WAN lines share the same five WAN (layer-2) interfaces that you configure in the ZyXEL Device. Refer to
for the Network Settings> Broadband screen.
24
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Introducing the VSG1432-B101
Computers can connect to the ZyXEL Device’s LAN ports (or wirelessly).
Figure 1 ZyXEL Device’s Internet Access Application
WLAN
WAN
Bridging
IPoE
PPPoE
ADSL / VDSL
LAN
A
WLAN WAN
IPoA / PPPoA
ADSL
LAN
A
WLAN
WAN
Bridging
IPoE
PPPoE
Ethernet
LAN
A
DSL
You can also configure IP filtering on the ZyXEL Device for secure Internet access.
When the IP filter is on, all incoming traffic from the Internet to your network is blocked by default unless it is initiated from your network. This means that probes from the outside to your network are not allowed, but you can safely browse the
Internet and download files.
1.4.2 ZyXEL Device’s USB Support
The USB port of the ZyXEL Device is used for file-sharing.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
25
Chapter 1 Introducing the VSG1432-B101
File Sharing
Use the built-in USB 2.0 port to share files on a USB memory stick or a USB hard drive (B). You can connect one USB hard drive to the ZyXEL Device at a time. Use
FTP to access the files on the USB device.
Figure 2 USB File Sharing Application
B
A
1.5 Hardware Setup
Place the ZyXEL Device flat on a desk or table or on the stand for a vertical installation.
Remove the ZyXEL Device’s clear plastic covers before using it.
26
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Introducing the VSG1432-B101
To connect the stand, line up the arrow on the stand with the arrow on the bottom of the device as shown.
Figure 3 Connecting the Stand
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
27
Chapter 1 Introducing the VSG1432-B101
1.6 Hardware Connections
To connect your ZyXEL Device:
Figure 4 Hardware Connections
1
5
4
3
2
28
1
Attach the antenna and point it up.
2
Do one of the following for your Internet connection:
2a
DSL WAN: Use a telephone cable to connect your ZyXEL Device’s DSL WAN port to a telephone jack (or the DSL or modem jack on a splitter if you have one).
2b
ETHERNET WAN: If you already have a broadband router or modem, use an
Ethernet cable to connect the ETHERNET WAN port to it for Internet access.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Introducing the VSG1432-B101
3
LAN: Use an Ethernet cable to connect a computer to a LAN port for initial configuration and/or Internet access.
4
USB: Connect a USB (version 2.0 or lower) memory stick or a USB hard drive for file sharing. Use a USB extension cable if the stick is too big to fit.
5
POWER: Use the provided power adaptor to connect the POWER socket to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power at the outlet is on. After connecting the power adaptor, look at the lights on the front panel.
1.7 LEDs (Lights)
The following graphic displays the labels of the LEDs.
Figure 5 LEDs on the Device
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
29
Chapter 1 Introducing the VSG1432-B101
None of the LEDs are on if the ZyXEL Device is not receiving power.
Table 1 LED Descriptions
LED
POWER
ETHERNET
1-4
ETHERNET
WAN
USB
COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION
Green On The ZyXEL Device is receiving power and ready for use.
Red
Green
Green
Green
DSL WAN Green
INTERNET Green
Blinking The ZyXEL Device is self-testing.
On The ZyXEL Device detected an error while self-testing, or there is a device malfunction.
Off The ZyXEL Device is not receiving power.
Blinking Firmware upgrade is in progress.
On The ZyXEL Device has a successful 100 Mbps Ethernet connection with a device on the Local Area Network
(LAN).
Blinking The ZyXEL Device is sending or receiving data to/from the LAN at 100 Mbps.
Off The ZyXEL Device does not have an Ethernet connection with the LAN.
On The Gigabit Ethernet connection is working.
Blinking The ZyXEL Device is sending or receiving data to/from the Gigabit Ethernet link.
Off
On
There is no Gigabit Ethernet link.
The ZyXEL Device recognizes a USB connection.
Blinking The ZyXEL Device is sending/receiving data to /from the
USB device connected to it.
Off
On
The ZyXEL Device does not detect a USB connection.
The DSL line is up.
Blinking The ZyXEL Device is initializing the DSL line.
Off The DSL line is down.
On The ZyXEL Device has an IP connection but no traffic.
WLAN/
WPS
Green
Green and
Orange
Your device has a WAN IP address (either static or assigned by a DHCP server), PPP negotiation was successfully completed (if used) and the DSL connection is up.
Blinking The ZyXEL Device is sending or receiving IP traffic.
Off There is no Internet connection or the gateway is in bridged mode.
On The wireless network is activated.
Blinking The ZyXEL Device is communicating with other wireless clients.
Blinking The ZyXEL Device is setting up a WPS connection.
Off The wireless network is not activated.
30
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 1 Introducing the VSG1432-B101
1.8 The RESET Button
If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator, you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the device to reload the factory-default configuration file. This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to “1234”.
1
Make sure the POWER LED is on (not blinking).
2
To set the device back to the factory default settings, press the RESET button for ten seconds or until the POWER LED begins to blink and then release it. When the
POWER LED begins to blink, the defaults have been restored and the device restarts.
1.9 Wireless Access
The ZyXEL Device is a wireless Access Point (AP) for wireless clients, such as notebook computers or PDAs and iPads. It allows them to connect to the Internet without having to rely on inconvenient Ethernet cables.
You can configure your wireless network in either the built-in Web Configurator, or using the WPS button.
Figure 6 Wireless Access Example
1.9.1 Using the WLAN/WPS Button
If the wireless network is turned off, press the WLAN/WPS button on the front of the ZyXEL Device for one second. Once the WLAN/WPS LED turns green, the wireless network is active.
You can also use the WLAN/WPS button to quickly set up a secure wireless connection between the ZyXEL Device and a WPS-compatible client by adding one device at a time.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
31
Chapter 1 Introducing the VSG1432-B101
To activate WPS:
1
Make sure the POWER LED is on and not blinking.
2
Press the WLAN/WPS button for five seconds and release it.
3
Press the WPS button on another WPS-enabled device within range of the ZyXEL
Device. The WLAN/WPS LED flashes green and orange while the ZyXEL Device sets up a WPS connection with the other wireless device.
4
Once the connection is successfully made, the WLAN/WPS LED shines green.
To turn off the wireless network, press the WLAN/WPS button on the front of the
ZyXEL Device for one to five seconds. The WLAN/WPS LED turns off when the wireless network is off.
32
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 2
The Web Configurator
2.1 Overview
The web configurator is an HTML-based management interface that allows easy device setup and management via Internet browser. Use Internet Explorer 6.0 and later versions or Mozilla Firefox 3 and later versions or Safari 2.0 and later versions. The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels.
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device. Web pop-up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service Pack) 2.
• JavaScripts (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
See Appendix C on page 355 if you need to make sure these functions are allowed
in Internet Explorer.
2.1.1 Accessing the Web Configurator
1
Make sure your ZyXEL Device hardware is properly connected (refer to the Quick
Start Guide).
2
Launch your web browser. If the ZyXEL Device does not automatically re-direct you to the login screen, go to http://192.168.1.1.
3
A password screen displays. To access the administrative web configurator and manage the ZyXEL Device, type the default username admin and password 1234 in the password screen and click Login. If advanced account security is enabled
(see
Section 27.2 on page 283 ) the number of dots that appears when you type
the password changes randomly to prevent anyone watching the password field from knowing the length of your password. If you have changed the password,
33
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator enter your password and click Login. For security reasons, you will be temporarily denied access to the ZyXEL Device for a period of time (15 minutes by default) if you have entered the incorrect username and password for a certain number of times (three times by default).
Figure 7 Password Screen
4
A welcome screen appears showing a summary of your last login, such as the time, number of failed login attempts, and when the password expires. It also shows if you are logged on from an IP address. Select Show this page next time to see the welcome screen on your next login. Otherwise, deselect it. Click
Continue.
Figure 8 Welcome Screen
5
The following screen displays if you have not yet changed your password. It is strongly recommended you change the default password. Enter a new password, retype it to confirm and click Apply; alternatively click Skip to proceed to the main menu if you do not want to change the password now.
Figure 9 Change Password Screen
34
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
6
The Network Map page appears.
Figure 10 Network Map
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
Note: For security reasons, the ZyXEL Device automatically logs you out if you do not use the web configurator for ten minutes (default). If this happens, log in again.
7
Click Status to display the Status screen, where you can view the ZyXEL Device’s interface and system information.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
35
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
2.2 Web Configurator Layout
Figure 11 Screen Layout
A
B
36
C
As illustrated above, the main screen is divided into these parts:
• A - title bar
• B - main window
• C - navigation panel
2.2.1 Title Bar
The title bar provides some icons in the upper right corner.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
The icons provide the following functions.
Table 2 Web Configurator Icons in the Title Bar
ICON DESCRIPTION
Quick Start: Click this icon to open screens where you can configure the
ZyXEL Device’s time zone Internet access, and wireless settings.
Logout: Click this icon to log out of the web configurator.
2.2.2 Main Window
The main window displays information and configuration fields. It is discussed in the rest of this document.
After you click Status on the Network Map page, the Status screen is displayed.
See Chapter 5 on page 71 for more information about the Status screen.
2.2.3 Navigation Panel
Use the menu items on the navigation panel to open screens to configure ZyXEL
Device features. The following tables describe each menu item.
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary
LINK
Network Map
TAB FUNCTION
This screen shows the network status of the ZyXEL Device and computers/devices connected to it.
Network Settings
Broadband
Wireless General
More AP
MAC
Authentication
WPS
WMM
WDS
Others
Use this screen to view and configure ISP parameters, WAN IP address assignment, and other advanced properties. You can also add new WAN connections.
Use this screen to configure the wireless LAN settings and WLAN authentication/security settings.
Use this screen to configure multiple BSSs on the ZyXEL Device.
Use this screen to block or allow wireless traffic from wireless devices of certain SSIDs and MAC addresses to the ZyXEL Device.
Use this screen to configure and view your WPS (Wi-Fi Protected
Setup) settings.
Use this screen to enable or disable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM).
Use this screen to set up Wireless Distribution System (WDS) links to other access points.
Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
37
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary
LINK
Home
Networking
Routing
QoS
NAT
DNS
IGMP
TAB
LAN Setup
FUNCTION
Use this screen to configure LAN TCP/IP settings, and other advanced properties.
Static DHCP
UPnP
Static Route
Use this screen to assign specific IP addresses to individual MAC addresses.
Use this screen to turn UPnP and UPnP NAT-T on or off.
Use this screen to view and set up static routes on the ZyXEL
Device.
Use this screen to configure policy routing on the ZyXEL Device.
Policy
Forwarding
General
Queue Setup
Class Setup
Policer Setup
Monitor
Port
Forwarding
Applications
Use this screen to enable QoS and traffic prioritizing. You can also configure the QoS rules and actions.
Use this screen to configure QoS queues.
Use this screen to define a classifier.
Use these screens to configure QoS policers.
Use this screen to view QoS packets statistics.
Use this screen to make your local world.
servers visible to the outside
Use this screen to configure servers behind the ZyXEL Device.
Port Triggering Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device’s port triggering settings.
DMZ Use this screen to configure a default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the Port Forwarding screen.
ALG
Sessions
Use this screen to enable or disable SIP ALG.
Use this screen to limit the number of NAT sessions a single client can establish.
Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes.
DNS Entry
Dynamic DNS Use this screen to allow a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address.
General
IGMP Filter
IGMP ACL
Use this screen to configure general IGMP proxy and IGMP packet processing settings.
Use this screen to control IGMP access.
Use this screen to block or allow access to specific multicast media channels.
Use this screen to map a port to a PVC or bridge group.
Interface
Group
Security Settings
Firewall
MAC Filter
General
Protocol
Use this screen to configure the security level of your firewall.
Use this screen to add or remove predefined Internet services and configure firewall rules.
Access Control Use this screen to enable specific traffic directions for network services.
Use this screen to block or allow traffic from devices of certain
MAC addresses to the ZyXEL Device.
38
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
Table 3 Navigation Panel Summary
LINK
Parental
Control
TAB FUNCTION
Use this screen to block web sites with the specific URL.
Scheduler
Rule
Certificates
IPSec
Service
Control
System Monitor
ARP Table
Local
Certificates
Trusted CA
Status
Settings
Use this screen to configure the days and times when a configured restriction (such as parental control) is enforced.
Use this screen to view a summary list of certificates and manage certificates and certification requests.
Use this screen to view and manage the list of the trusted CAs.
Use this screen to view the status of IPSec tunnels.
Use this screen to add and configure IPSec tunnels.
Use this screen to control service access to the ZyXEL Device.
Log
Traffic Status
IGMP Group
Status
System Log
Security Log
WAN
Use this screen to view the ARP table. It displays the IP and MAC address of each DHCP connection.
Use this screen to view the status of events that occurred to the
ZyXEL Device. You can export or e-mail the logs.
Use this screen to view the login record of the ZyXEL Device. You can export or e-mail the logs.
Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the WAN port of the ZyXEL Device.
LAN
IGMP Group
Use this screen to view the status of all network traffic going through the LAN ports of the ZyXEL Device.
Use this screen to view the status of all IGMP settings on the
ZyXEL Device.
IGMP Statistics Use this screen to view the ZyXEL Device’s IGMP multicast group and IGMP traffic statistics.
Maintenance
Users
Account
Remote
MGMT
Time
Log Setting
Firmware
Upgrade
Configuration
General Use this screen to add and configure user accounts on the ZyXEL
Device.
TR-069 Client Use this screen to configure the ZyXEL Device to be managed by an Auto Configuration Server (ACS).
TR-064 Client Use this screen to enable management via TR-064 on the LAN.
Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device’s time and date.
Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device’s log settings.
Use this screen to upload firmware to your device.
Reboot
Diagnostic Ping &
TraceRoute &
NsLookup
Use this screen to backup and restore your device’s configuration
(settings) or reset the factory default settings.
Use this screen to reboot the ZyXEL Device without turning the power off.
Use this screen to identify problems with the DSL connection. You can use Ping, TraceRoute, or Nslookup to help you identify problems.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
39
Chapter 2 The Web Configurator
40
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 3
Quick Start
3.1 Overview
Use the Quick Start screens to configure the ZyXEL Device’s time zone and basic
Internet access and wireless settings.
Note: See the technical reference chapters (starting on
) for background
information on the features in this chapter.
3.2 Quick Start Setup
1
Click the Click Start icon in the top right corner of the web configurator to open the quick start screens. Select the time zone of the ZyXEL Device’s location and click Next.
Figure 12 Time Zone
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
41
Chapter 3 Quick Start
2
Enter your PPPoE account’s user name and password exactly as provided by your
Internet Service Provider (ISP). If your ISP also gave you static IP address settings to use, select Yes and enter them in the fields that display. Click Next.
Figure 13 Internet Connection
3
Turn the wireless LAN on or off. If you keep it on, record the security settings so you can configure your wireless clients to connect to the ZyXEL Device. Click
Save.
Figure 14 Internet Connection
42
4
Your ZyXEL Device saves your settings and attempts to connect to the Internet.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 4
Tutorials
4.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to use the ZyXEL Device’s various features.
•
Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection
, see
•
Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network
, see
•
Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups , see page 53
•
Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding
, see
•
Configuring Static Route for Routing to Another Network , see page 58
•
Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup , see page 60
•
Access the ZyXEL Device Using DDNS , see page 63
•
Access Your Shared Files From a Computer , see page 65
4.2 Setting Up an ADSL PPPoE Connection
This tutorial shows you how to set up your Internet connection using the Web
Configurator.
If you connect to the Internet through an ADSL connection, use the information from your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to configure the ZyXEL Device. Be sure to contact your service provider for any information you need to configure the
Broadband screens.
1
Click Network Settings > Broadband to open the following screen. Click Add
New WAN Interface.
43
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
2
In this example, the DSL connection has the following information.
General
Connection Name
Type
Connection Mode
Encapsulation
ATM PVC Configuration
VPI/VCI
Encapsulation Mode
Service Category
Account Information
PPP User Name
PPP Password
PPPoE Service Name
Static IP Address
Others
MyDSLConnection
ADSL
Routing
PPPoE
36/48
LLC/SNAP-Bridging
UBR without PCR
ABCDEF!
My DSL
192.168.1.32
PPPoE Passthrough: Disabled
NAT: Enabled
IGMP Multicast Proxy: Enabled
Apply as Default Gateway: Enabled
3
Select the Active check box. Enter the General and ATM PVC Configuration settings as provided above.
Set the Type to ADSL.
Choose the Encapsulation specified by your DSL service provider. For this example, the service provider requires a username and password to establish
Internet connection. Therefore, select PPPoE as the WAN encapsulation type.
4
Enter the account information provided to you by your DSL service provider.
5
Configure this rule as your default Internet connection by selecting the Apply as
Default Gateway check box . Then select DNS as Static and enter the DNS server addresses provided to you, such as 192.168.5.2 (DNS server1)/192.168.5.1
(DNS server2).
44
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
6
Click Apply to save your settings.
Chapter 4 Tutorials
7
You should see a summary of your new DSL connection setup in the Broadband screen as follows.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
45
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Try to connect to a website, such as zyxel.com to see if you have correctly set up your Internet connection. Be sure to contact your service provider for any information you need to configure the WAN screens.
4.3 Setting Up a Secure Wireless Network
Thomas wants to set up a wireless network so that he can use his notebook to access the Internet. In this wireless network, the ZyXEL Device serves as an access point (AP), and the notebook is the wireless client. The wireless client can access the Internet through the AP.
Thomas has to configure the wireless network settings on the ZyXEL Device. Then he can set up a wireless network using WPS (
Section 4.3.2 on page 48 ) or manual
configuration (
4.3.1 Configuring the Wireless Network Settings
This example uses the following parameters to set up a wireless network.
SSID
Security Mode
Pre-Shared Key
802.11 Mode
Example
WPA-PSK
DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork
802.11b/g/n Mixed
46
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
1
Click Network Settings > Wireless to open the General screen. Select More
Secure as the security level and WPA-PSK as the security mode. Configure the screen using the provided parameters (see
). Click Apply.
2
Go to the Wireless > Others screen and select 802.11b/g/n Mixed in the
802.11 Mode field. Click Apply.
Thomas can now use the WPS feature to establish a wireless connection between his notebook and the ZyXEL Device (see
Section 4.3.2 on page 48 ). He can also
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
47
Chapter 4 Tutorials use the notebook’s wireless client to search for the ZyXEL Device (see
).
4.3.2 Using WPS
This section shows you how to set up a wireless network using WPS. It uses the
ZyXEL Device as the AP and ZyXEL NWD210N as the wireless client which connects to the notebook.
Note: The wireless client must be a WPS-aware device (for example, a WPS USB adapter or PCMCIA card).
There are two WPS methods to set up the wireless client settings:
• Push Button Configuration (PBC) - simply press a button. This is the easier of the two methods.
• PIN Configuration - configure a Personal Identification Number (PIN) on the
ZyXEL Device. A wireless client must also use the same PIN in order to download the wireless network settings from the ZyXEL Device.
Push Button Configuration (PBC)
1
Make sure that your ZyXEL Device is turned on and your notebook is within the cover range of the wireless signal.
2
Make sure that you have installed the wireless client driver and utility in your notebook.
3
In the wireless client utility, go to the WPS setting page. Enable WPS and press the WPS button (Start or WPS button).
48
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
4
Push and hold the WPS button located on the ZyXEL Device’s front panel for more than 5 seconds. Alternatively, you may log into ZyXEL Device’s web configurator and go to the Network Settings > Wireless > WPS screen. Enable the WPS function and click Apply. Then click the Connect button.
Note: Your ZyXEL Device has a WPS button located on its front panel as well as a
WPS button in its configuration utility. Both buttons have exactly the same function: you can use one or the other.
Note: It doesn’t matter which button is pressed first. You must press the second button within two minutes of pressing the first one.
The ZyXEL Device sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client.
This may take up to two minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate with the ZyXEL Device securely.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
49
Chapter 4 Tutorials
The following figure shows you an example of how to set up a wireless network and its security by pressing a button on both ZyXEL Device and wireless client.
Example WPS Process: PBC Method
Wireless Client ZyXEL Device
WPS
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
Press and hold for
5 seconds
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
50
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
PIN Configuration
When you use the PIN configuration method, you need to use both the ZyXEL
Device’s web configurator and the wireless client’s utility.
1
Launch your wireless client’s configuration utility. Go to the WPS settings and select the PIN method to get a PIN number.
2
Log into ZyXEL Device’s web configurator and go to the Network Settings >
Wireless > WPS screen. Enable the WPS function and click Apply.
3
Enter the PIN number of the wireless client and click the Register button.
Activate WPS function on the wireless client utility screen within two minutes.
The ZyXEL Device authenticates the wireless client and sends the proper configuration settings to the wireless client. This may take up to two minutes. The wireless client is then able to communicate with the ZyXEL Device securely.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
51
Chapter 4 Tutorials
The following figure shows you how to set up a wireless network and its security on a ZyXEL Device and a wireless client by using PIN method.
Example WPS Process: PIN Method
Wireless Client ZyXEL Device
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
Authentication by PIN
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
4.3.3 Without WPS
Use the wireless adapter’s utility installed on the notebook to search for the
“Example” SSID. Then enter the “DoNotStealMyWirelessNetwork” pre-shared key to establish an wireless Internet connection.
52
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Note: The ZyXEL Device supports IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g wireless clients.
Make sure that your notebook or computer’s wireless adapter supports one of these standards.
4.4 Setting Up Multiple Wireless Groups
Company A wants to create different wireless network groups for different types of users as shown in the following figure. Each group has its own SSID and security mode.
Company
VIP Guest
• Employees in Company A will use a general Comapny wireless network group.
• Higher management level and important visitors will use the VIP group.
• Visiting guests will use the Guest group, which has a lower security mode.
Company A will use the following parameters to set up the wireless network groups.
SSID
Security Level
Security Mode
COMPANY
Company
More Secure
WPA2-PSK
Pre-Shared Key ForCompanyOnly
VIP
VIP
More Secure
WPA2-PSK
ForVIPOnly
GUEST
Guest
Basic
Static WEP
Guest
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
53
Chapter 4 Tutorials
1
Click Network Settings > Wireless to open the General screen. Use this screen to set up the company’s general wireless network group. Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply.
54
2
Click Network Settings > Wireless > More AP to open the following screen.
Click the Edit icon to configure the second wireless network group.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
3
Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply.
4
In the More AP screen, click the Edit icon to configure the third wireless network group.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
55
Chapter 4 Tutorials
5
Configure the screen using the provided parameters and click Apply.
6
Check the status of VIP and Guest in the More AP screen. The yellow bulbs signify that the SSIDs are active and ready for wireless access.
4.5 Setting Up NAT Port Forwarding
Thomas manages the Doom server on a computer behind the ZyXEL Device. In order for players on the Internet (like A in the figure below) to communicate with the Doom server, Thomas needs to configure the port settings and IP address on
56
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials the ZyXEL Device. Traffic should be forwarded to the port 666 of the Doom server computer which has an IP address of 192.168.1.34.
Tutorial: NAT Port Forwarding Setup
D=192.168.1.34
port 666
LAN WAN
A
Thomas may set up the port settings by configuring the port settings for the Doom
server computer (see Section 12.2 on page 176 for more information).
1
Click Network Settings > NAT > Add new rule and configure the screen with the following values:
Service Name
WAN Interface
External Port/s
Server IP Address
Protocol
Doom_Server
Select the WAN interface through which the Doom service is forwarded. This example uses MyDSLConnection.
Enter 666 as the Start and End port.
Enter the IP address of the Doom server. This is 192.168.1.34 for this example.
Select TCP/UDP. This should be the protocol supported by the
Doom server.
2
The screen should look as follows. Click Apply.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
57
Chapter 4 Tutorials
3
The port forwarding settings you configured appear in the table. The ZyXEL Device forwards port 666 traffic to the computer with IP address 192.168.1.34.
Players on the Internet then can have access to Thomas’ Doom server.
4.6 Configuring Static Route for Routing to
Another Network
In order to extend your Intranet and control traffic flowing directions, you may connect a router to the ZyXEL Device’s LAN. The router may be used to separate two department networks. This tutorial shows how to configure a static routing rule for two network routings.
In the following figure, router R is connected to the ZyXEL Device’s LAN. R connects to two networks, N1 (192.168.1.x/24) and N2 (192.168.10.x/24). If you want to send traffic from computer A (in N1 network) to computer B (in N2 network), the traffic is sent to the ZyXEL Device’s WAN default gateway by default. In this case, B will never receive the traffic.
N1
A
R
B
N2
58
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
You need to specify a static routing rule on the ZyXEL Device to specify R as the router in charge of forwarding traffic to N2. In this case, the ZyXEL Device routes traffic from A to R and then R routes the traffic to B.
N1
A
R
N2
B
This tutorial uses the following example IP settings:
Table 4 IP Settings in this Tutorial
DEVICE / COMPUTER
The ZyXEL Device’s WAN
The ZyXEL Device’s LAN
A
R’s N1
R’s N2
B
IP ADDRESS
172.16.1.1
192.168.1.1
192.168.1.34
192.168.1.253
192.168.10.2
192.168.10.33
To configure a static route to route traffic from N1 to N2:
1
Log into the ZyXEL Device’s Web Configurator in advanced mode.
2
Click Advanced > Routing.
3
Click Add New Static Route Entry in the Static Route screen.
4
Configure the Static Route Setup screen using the following settings:
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
59
Chapter 4 Tutorials
4a
Select the Active check box. Enter the Route Name as R.
4b
Type 192.168.10.0 and subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for the destination,
N2.
4c
Type 192.168.1.253 (R’s N1 address) in the Gateway IP Address field.
4a
Click Apply.
Now B should be able to receive traffic from A. You may need to additionally configure B’s firewall settings to allow specific traffic to pass through.
4.7 Configuring QoS Queue and Class Setup
This section contains tutorials on how you can configure the QoS screen.
Let’s say you are a team leader of a small sales branch office. You want to prioritize e-mail traffic because your task includes sending urgent updates to clients at least twice every hour. You also upload data files (such as logs and email archives) to the FTP server throughout the day. Your colleagues use the
Internet for research, as well as chat applications for communicating with other branch offices.
In the following figure, your Internet connection has an upstream transmission bandwidth of 10,000 kbps. For this example, you want to configure QoS so that email traffic gets the highest priority with at least 5,000 kbps. You can do the following:
• Configure a queue to assign the highest priority queue (1) to e-mail traffic going to the WAN interface, so that e-mail traffic would not get delayed when there is network congestion.
• Note the IP address (192.168.1.23 for example) and/or MAC address
(AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF for example) of your computer and map it to queue 7.
60
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Note: QoS is applied to traffic flowing out of the ZyXEL Device.
Traffic that does not match this class is assigned a priority queue based on the internal QoS mapping table on the ZyXEL Device.
QoS Example
DSL
10,000 kbps
Your computer
IP=192.168.1.23
and/or
MAC=AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF
Email traffic: Highest priority
A colleague’s computer
Other traffic: Automatic classifier
1
Click Network Settings > QoS > General and select Active. Set your WAN
Managed Upstream Bandwidth to 10,000 kbps (or leave this blank to have the
ZyXEL Device automatically determine this figure). Click Apply.
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS
2
Click Queue Setup > Add new Queue to create a new queue. In the screen that opens, check Active and enter or select the following values:
• Name: E-mail
•
To Interface
: WAN
• Priority: 1 (High)
• Weight: 8
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
61
Chapter 4 Tutorials
• Rate Limit: 5,000 (kbps)
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Queue Setup
3
Click Class Setup > Add new Classifier to create a new class. Check Active and follow the settings as shown in the screen below.
Tutorial: Advanced > QoS > Class Setup
62
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Class Name
From Interface
Ether Type
IP Address
Give a class name to this traffic, such as E-mail in this example.
This is the interface from which the traffic will be coming from. Select
LAN1 for this example.
Select IP to identify the traffic source by its IP address or MAC address.
Type the IP address of your computer - 192.168.1.23. Type the IP
Subnet Mask if you know it.
MAC Address Type the MAC address of your computer - AA:FF:AA:FF:AA:FF. Type the MAC Mask if you know it.
To Queue Index Link this to an item in the Network Settings > QoS > Queue
Setup screen, which is the E-mail queue created in this example.
This maps e-mail traffic coming from port 25 to the highest priority, which you have created in the previous screen (see the IP Protocol field). This also maps your computer’s IP address and MAC address to the E-mail queue (see the
Source fields).
4
Verify that the queue setup works by checking Network Settings > QoS >
Monitor. This shows the bandwidth allotted to e-mail traffic compared to other network traffic.
4.8 Access the ZyXEL Device Using DDNS
If you connect your ZyXEL Device to the Internet and it uses a dynamic WAN IP address, it is inconvenient for you to manage the device from the Internet. The
ZyXEL Device’s WAN IP address changes dynamically. Dynamic DNS (DDNS) allows you to access the ZyXEL Device using a domain name. http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org
a.b.c.d
A
w.x.y.z
To use this feature, you have to apply for DDNS service at www.dyndns.org.
This tutorial covers:
•
Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
63
Chapter 4 Tutorials
•
Configuring DDNS on Your ZyXEL Device
•
Note: If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use DDNS.
4.8.1 Registering a DDNS Account on www.dyndns.org
1
Open a browser and type http://www.dyndns.org.
2
Apply for a user account. This tutorial uses UserName1 and 12345 as the username and password.
3
Log into www.dyndns.org using your account.
4
Add a new DDNS host name. This tutorial uses the following settings as an example.
• Hostname: zyxelrouter.dyndns.org
• Service Type: Host with IP address
• IP Address: Enter the WAN IP address that your ZyXEL Device is currently using.
You can find the IP address on the ZyXEL Device’s Web Configurator Status page.
Then you will need to configure the same account and host name on the ZyXEL
Device later.
4.8.2 Configuring DDNS on Your ZyXEL Device
Configure the following settings in the Advanced > DNS Setting > Dynamic
DNS screen.
• Select Enable Dynamic DNS.
• Select DynDNS.org as the service provider.
• Type zyxelrouter.dyndns.org in the Host Name field.
64
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
• Enter the user name (UserName1) and password (12345).
Chapter 4 Tutorials
Click Apply.
4.8.3 Testing the DDNS Setting
Now you should be able to access the ZyXEL Device from the Internet. To test this:
1
Open a web browser on the computer (using the IP address a.b.c.d) that is connected to the Internet.
2
Type http://zyxelrouter.dyndns.org and press [Enter].
3
The ZyXEL Device’s login page should appear. You can then log into the ZyXEL
Device and manage it.
4.9 Access Your Shared Files From a Computer
Here is how to use an FTP program to access a file storage device connected to the ZyXEL Device’s USB port.
Note: This example uses the FileZilla FTP program to browse your shared files.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
65
Chapter 4 Tutorials
1
In FileZilla enter the IP address of the ZyXEL Device (the default is 192.168.1.1), your account’s user name and password and port 21 and click Quickconnect. A screen asking for password authentication appears.
File Sharing via Windows Explorer
Once you log in the USB device displays in the
mnt
folder.
66
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
P
ART
II
Technical Reference
67
68
C H A P T E R 5
Network Map and Status
Screens
5.1 Overview
After you log into the Web Configurator, the Network Map screen appears. This shows the network connection status of the ZyXEL Device and clients connected to it.
You can use the Status screen to look at the current status of the ZyXEL Device, system resources, and interfaces (LAN, WAN, and WLAN).
5.2 The Network Map Screen
Use this screen to view the network connection status of the device and its clients.
A warning message appears if there is a connection problem.
69
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens
If you prefer to view the status in a list, click List View in the Viewing Mode selection box. You can configure how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen in Refresh Interval.
Figure 15 Network Map: Icon Mode
Figure 16 Network Map: List Mode
In Icon Mode, if you want to view information about a client, click the client’s name and Info. Click the IP address if you want to change it. If you want to change the name or icon of the client, click Change name/icon.
In List Mode, you can also view the client’s information and click on the IP address if you want to change it.
70
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens
5.3 The Status Screen
Use this screen to view the status of the ZyXEL Device. Click Status to open this screen.
Figure 17 Status Screen
Each field is described in the following table.
Table 5 Status Screen
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval Select how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen.
Device Information
Host Name This field displays the ZyXEL Device system name. It is used for identification.
This shows the model number of your ZyXEL Device.
Model
Number
Firmware
Version
This is the current version of the firmware inside the device.
WAN Information (These fields display when you have a WAN connection.)
MAC Address This shows the WAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control)
Address of your device.
IP Address
This field is available only when your WAN type is IPoE or PPPoE.
This field displays the current IP address of the ZyXEL Device in the
WAN.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
71
Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens
Table 5 Status Screen
LABEL DESCRIPTION
IP Subnet Mask This field displays the current subnet mask in the WAN.
WAN Type
LAN Information
MAC
Address
IP Address
IP Subnet
Mask
DHCP
This field is available only when your WAN type is IPoE or IPoA.
This field displays the current WAN connection type.
This shows the LAN Ethernet adapter MAC (Media Access Control)
Address of your device.
This is the current IP address of the ZyXEL Device in the LAN.
This is the current subnet mask in the LAN.
This field displays what DHCP services the ZyXEL Device is providing to the LAN. Choices are:
Server - The ZyXEL Device is a DHCP server in the LAN. It assigns IP addresses to other computers in the LAN.
Relay - The ZyXEL Device acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays
DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients.
None - The ZyXEL Device is not providing any DHCP services to the
LAN.
WLAN Information
MAC
Address
This shows the wireless adapter MAC (Media Access Control) Address of your device.
Status
Name
(SSID)
Channel
Security
Mode
This displays whether WLAN is activated.
This is the descriptive name used to identify the ZyXEL Device in a wireless LAN.
This is the channel number used by the ZyXEL Device now.
This displays the type of security mode the ZyXEL Device is using in the wireless LAN.
802.11
Mode
This displays the type of 802.11 mode the ZyXEL Device is using in the wireless LAN.
This displays whether WPS is activated. WPS
Interface Status
Interface This column displays each interface the ZyXEL Device has.
72
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens
Table 5 Status Screen
LABEL
Status
DESCRIPTION
This field indicates whether or not the ZyXEL Device is using the interface.
For the LAN interfaces or the Ethernet WAN interface, this field displays
Up when the ZyXEL Device is using the interface and NoLink when the line is disconnected.
For the WLAN interface, it displays Active when WLAN is enabled or
InActive when WLAN is disabled.
Rate
For the DSL interface, this field displays NoLink (line is down), Up (line is up or connected) if you're using Ethernet encapsulation and NoLink
(line is down), Up (line is up or connected), Idle (line (ppp) idle), Dial
(starting to trigger a call) and Drop (dropping a call) if you're using
PPPoE encapsulation.
For the LAN interface, this displays the port speed and duplex setting.
For the DSL interface, it displays the downstream and upstream transmission rate.
For the WLAN interface, it displays the maximum transmission rate when WLAN is enabled or N/A when WLAN is disabled.
System Status
System Up
Time
Current
Date/Time
This field displays how long the ZyXEL Device has been running since it last started up. The ZyXEL Device starts up when you plug it in, when you restart it (Maintenance > Reboot), or when you reset it.
This field displays the current date and time in the ZyXEL Device. You can change this in Maintenance> Time Setting.
System Resource
CPU Usage This field displays what percentage of the ZyXEL Device’s processing ability is currently used. When this percentage is close to 100%, the
ZyXEL Device is running at full load, and the throughput is not going to improve anymore. If you want some applications to have more throughput, you should turn off other applications (for example, using
QoS; see Chapter 10 on page 151 ).
Memory
Usage
This field displays what percentage of the ZyXEL Device’s memory is currently used. Usually, this percentage should not increase much. If memory usage does get close to 100%, the ZyXEL Device is probably becoming unstable, and you should restart the device. See
Section 32.2 on page 301 , or turn off the device (unplug the power) for a few
seconds.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
73
Chapter 5 Network Map and Status Screens
74
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 6
Broadband
6.1 Overview
This chapter describes how to configure WAN settings from the Broadband screen. Use this screen to configure your ZyXEL Device for Internet access.
A WAN (Wide Area Network) connection is an outside connection to another network or the Internet. It connects your private networks (such as a LAN (Local
Area Network) and other networks, so that a computer in one location can communicate with computers in other locations.
Figure 18 LAN and WAN
LAN
WAN
6.1.1 What You Need to Know
Encapsulation Method
Encapsulation is used to include data from an upper layer protocol into a lower layer protocol. To set up a WAN connection to the Internet, you need to use the same encapsulation method used by your ISP (Internet Service Provider). If your
ISP offers a dial-up Internet connection using PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet) or PPPoA, they should also provide a username and password (and service name) for user authentication.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
75
Chapter 6 Broadband
WAN IP Address
The WAN IP address is an IP address for the ZyXEL Device, which makes it accessible from an outside network. It is used by the ZyXEL Device to communicate with other devices in other networks. It can be static (fixed) or dynamically assigned by the ISP each time the ZyXEL Device tries to access the
Internet.
If your ISP assigns you a static WAN IP address, they should also assign you the subnet mask and DNS server IP address(es) (and a gateway IP address if you use the Ethernet encapsulation method).
Multicast
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender - 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender - everybody on the network).
Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network - not everybody and not just one.
IGMP
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data.
There are three versions of IGMP. IGMP version 2 and 3 are improvements over version 1, but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use.
Finding Out More
See Section 6.3 on page 86 for technical background information on WAN.
6.1.2 Before You Begin
You need to know your Internet access settings such as encapsulation and WAN IP address. Get this information from your ISP.
76
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Broadband
6.2 The Broadband Screen
Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device’s Internet access settings. Click
Network Settings> Broadband from the menu. The summary table shows you the configured WAN services (connections) on the ZyXEL Device.
Figure 19 Network Settings > Broadband
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 6 Network Settings > Broadband
LABEL
Add new WAN interface
DESCRIPTION
Click this button to create a new connection.
#
Status
Name
This is the index number of the entry.
This is the status of the connection.
This is the service name of the connection.
Type
Encapsulation
VLAN
VPI/VCI
This shows whether it is a VDSL, ADSL, or Ethernet connection.
This is the method of encapsulation used by this connection.
This is the Virtual LAN (VLAN) number configured for this WAN connection.
This is the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel Identifier
(VCI) numbers configured for this WAN connection.
This is the type of ATM QoS of the connection.
ATM QoS
IGMP Proxy This shows whether the ZyXEL Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection.
This shows whether NAT is activated or not for this connection. NAT
Default Gateway This shows whether the ZyXEL Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway.
Modify Click the Edit icon to configure the WAN connection.
Click the Delete icon to remove the WAN connection.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
77
Chapter 6 Broadband
6.2.1 Add/Edit Broadband
Click Add new WAN interface in the Broadband screen or the Edit icon next to an existing WAN interface to configure a WAN connection. The screen differs according to the mode and encapsulation you choose.
6.2.2 PPPoE Encapsulation
The ZyXEL Device supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an IETF standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. The PPPoE option is for a dial-up connection using PPPoE.
For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example Radius).
One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals.
Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site.
By implementing PPPoE directly on the ZyXEL Device (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the ZyXEL Device does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs’ computers will have access.
78
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Broadband
This screen displays when you select the Routing mode and PPPoE encapsulation.
Figure 20 Broadband: Add/Edit: ADSL, PPPoE Encapsulation
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
79
Chapter 6 Broadband
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 7 Broadband: Add/Edit: Routing Mode
LABEL
General
Active
Name
Type
Mode
DESCRIPTION
Select this to activate the WAN configuration settings.
Specify a descriptive name of up to 15 alphanumeric characters for this connection.
Select whether it is a VDSL, ADSL, or Ethernet connection.
Select Routing (default) from the drop-down list box if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an
Internet account.
Encapsulation
Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP’s DHCP server directly. If you select Bridge, you cannot use routing functions, such as Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s).
Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the dropdown list box. This option is available only when you select Routing in the Mode field.
The choices are PPPoE, PPPoA, IPoE and IPoA.
ATM PVC Configuration (These fields appear when the Type is set to ADSL.)
VPI
VCI
The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you.
The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you.
DSL Link Type This field is not editable. The selection depends on the setting in the
Encapsulation field.
EoA (Ethernet over ATM) uses an Ethernet header in the packet, so that you can have multiple services/connections over one PVC. You can set each connection to have its own MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for different services. EoA supports ENET ENCAP (IPoE), PPPoE and RFC1483/2684 bridging encapsulation methods.
PPPoA (PPP over ATM) allows just one PPPoA connection over a PVC.
IPoA (IP over ATM) allows just one RFC 1483 routing connection over a
PVC.
80
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Broadband
Table 7 Broadband: Add/Edit: Routing Mode
LABEL
Encapsulation
Mode
DESCRIPTION
Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the dropdown list box. Choices are:
Service
Category
• LLC/SNAP-BRIDGING: In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the
SNAP header. This is available only when you select IPoE or PPPoE in the Select DSL Link Type field.
• VC/MUX: In VC multiplexing, each protocol is carried on a single
ATM virtual circuit (VC). To transport multiple protocols, the ZyXEL
Device needs separate VCs. There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC. This reduces payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit (PDU) payload.
• LLC/ENCAPSULATION: More than one protocol can be carried over the same VC. This is available only when you select PPPoA in the Encapsulation field.
• LLC/SNAP-ROUTING: In LCC encapsulation, an IEEE 802.2
Logical Link Control (LLC) header is prefixed to each routed PDU to identify the PDUs. The LCC header can be followed by an IEEE
802.1a SubNetwork Attachment Point (SNAP) header. This is available only when you select IPoA in the Encapsulation field.
Select UBR Without PCR or UBR With PCR for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail.
Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic.
Peak Cell Rate
Sustain Cell
Rate
Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation.
Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation.
Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here.This field is not available when you select UBR Without PCR.
The Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR.
Note that system default is 0 cells/sec.
This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or
Realtime VBR.
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535.
Maximum Burst
Size
This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or
Realtime VBR.
PPP Information This is available only when you select PPPoE or PPPoA in the Mode field.
PPP Username Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned. If assigned a name in the form user@domain where domain identifies a service name, then enter both components exactly as given.
PPP Password Enter the password associated with the user name above.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
81
Chapter 6 Broadband
Table 7 Broadband: Add/Edit: Routing Mode
LABEL
PPP Auto
Connect
IDLE Timeout
DESCRIPTION
Select this option if you do not want the connection to time out.
This value specifies the time in minutes that elapses before the router automatically disconnects from the PPPoE server.
PPPoE Service
Name
PPPoE
Passthrough
This field is not configurable if you select PPP Auto Connect.
Enter the name of your PPPoE service here.
This field is available when you select PPPoE encapsulation.
In addition to the ZyXEL Device’s built-in PPPoE client, you can enable
PPPoE pass through to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the ZyXEL
Device. Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address.
PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate.
Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the
LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the
ISP.
IP Address
Obtain an IP
Address
Automatically
Static IP
Address
IP Address
IP Subnet
Mask
Gateway IP
Address
Routing Feature
NAT Enable
IGMP Proxy
Enable
A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP address is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet. Select this if you have a dynamic IP address.
Select this option If the ISP assigned a fixed IP address.
Enter the static IP address provided by your ISP.
Enter the subnet mask provided by your ISP.
Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP.
Apply as Default
Gateway
DNS Server
Select this option to activate NAT on this connection.
Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group - it is not used to carry user data.
Select this option to have the ZyXEL Device act as an IGMP proxy on this connection. This allows the ZyXEL Device to get subscribing information and maintain a joined member list for each multicast group. It can reduce multicast traffic significantly.
Select this option to have the ZyXEL Device use the WAN interface of this connection as the system default gateway.
This is available only when you select Apply as Default Gateway in the Routing Feature field.
82
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Broadband
Table 7 Broadband: Add/Edit: Routing Mode
LABEL
DNS
DESCRIPTION
Select Dynamic if you want the ZyXEL Device use the DNS server addresses assigned by your ISP.
DNS Server 1
DNS Server 2
Select Static if you want the ZyXEL Device use the DNS server addresses you configure manually.
Enter the first DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
Enter the second DNS server address assigned by the ISP.
VLAN (These fields appear when the Type is set to VDSL or Ethernet)
Active Select this option to add the VLAN tag (specified below) to the outgoing traffic through this connection.
802.1P IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service.
802.1Q
Apply
Cancel
Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level.
Type the VLAN ID number (from 1 to 4094) for traffic through this connection.
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
6.2.2.1 Bridge
This screen displays when you select the Bridge mode.
Figure 21 Broadband: Add/Edit: Bridge Mode
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
83
Chapter 6 Broadband
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 8 Broadband: Add/Edit: Bridge Mode
LABEL
General
Active
Name
Type
Mode
DESCRIPTION
Select this to activate the WAN configuration settings.
Specify a descriptive name of up to 15 alphanumeric characters for this connection.
Select whether it is a VDSL, ADSL, or Ethernet connection.
Select Routing (default) from the drop-down list box if your ISP give you one IP address only and you want multiple computers to share an
Internet account.
ATM PVC Configuration
VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255. Enter the VPI assigned to you.
VCI
Select Bridge when your ISP provides you more than one IP address and you want the connected computers to get individual IP address from ISP’s DHCP server directly. If you select Bridge, you cannot use routing functions, such as Firewall, DHCP server and NAT on traffic from the selected LAN port(s).
DSL Link Type
Encapsulation
Mode
The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Enter the VCI assigned to you.
This field is not editable. EoA (Ethernet over ATM) uses an Ethernet header in the packet, so that you can have multiple services/ connections over one PVC. You can set each connection to have its own
MAC address or all connections share one MAC address but use different VLAN IDs for different services.
Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the dropdown list box. Choices are:
Service
Category
• LLC/SNAP-BRIDGING: In LCC encapsulation, bridged PDUs are encapsulated by identifying the type of the bridged media in the
SNAP header.
• VC/MUX: In VC multiplexing, each protocol is carried on a single
ATM virtual circuit (VC). To transport multiple protocols, the ZyXEL
Device needs separate VCs. There is a binding between a VC and the type of the network protocol carried on the VC. This reduces payload overhead since there is no need to carry protocol information in each Protocol Data Unit (PDU) payload.
Select UBR Without PCR or UBR With PCR for applications that are non-time sensitive, such as e-mail.
Select CBR (Continuous Bit Rate) to specify fixed (always-on) bandwidth for voice or data traffic.
Select Non Realtime VBR (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) for connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation.
Select Realtime VBR (real-time Variable Bit Rate) for applications with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation.
84
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Broadband
Table 8 Broadband: Add/Edit: Bridge Mode
LABEL
Peak Cell Rate
Sustain Cell
Rate
DESCRIPTION
Divide the DSL line rate (bps) by 424 (the size of an ATM cell) to find the Peak Cell Rate (PCR). This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. Type the PCR here.This field is not available when you select UBR Without PCR.
The Sustain Cell Rate (SCR) sets the average cell rate (long-term) that can be transmitted. Type the SCR, which must be less than the PCR.
Note that system default is 0 cells/sec.
Maximum Burst
Size
This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or
Realtime VBR.
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate. Type the MBS, which is less than 65535.
VLAN (These fields appear when the Type is set to VDSL or Ethernet)
Active Select this option to add the VLAN tag (specified below) to the outgoing traffic through this connection.
802.1P
This field is available only when you select Non Realtime VBR or
Realtime VBR.
IEEE 802.1p defines up to 8 separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC-layer frame that contains bits to define class of service.
802.1Q
Apply
Cancel
Select the IEEE 802.1p priority level (from 0 to 7) to add to traffic through this connection. The greater the number, the higher the priority level.
Type the VLAN ID number (from 1 to 4094) for traffic through this connection.
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
85
Chapter 6 Broadband
6.3 Technical Reference
This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter.
6.3.1 Encapsulation
Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP. The ZyXEL Device supports the following methods.
6.3.1.1 PPP over Ethernet
The ZyXEL Device supports PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet). PPPoE is an IETF Draft standard (RFC 2516) specifying how a personal computer (PC) interacts with a broadband modem (DSL, cable, wireless, etc.) connection. The
PPPoE option is for a dial-up connection using PPPoE.
For the service provider, PPPoE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems (for example RADIUS).
One of the benefits of PPPoE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services, a function known as dynamic service selection. This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals.
Operationally, PPPoE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier, as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site.
By implementing PPPoE directly on the ZyXEL Device (rather than individual computers), the computers on the LAN do not need PPPoE software installed, since the ZyXEL Device does that part of the task. Furthermore, with NAT, all of the LANs’ computers will have access.
6.3.1.2 PPPoA
PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL5). A
PPPoA connection functions like a dial-up Internet connection. The ZyXEL Device encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC
(Permanent Virtual Circuit) to the Internet Service Provider’s (ISP) DSLAM (Digital
Subscriber Line (DSL) Access Multiplexer). Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPoA. Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP.
86
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Broadband
6.3.2 Multiplexing
There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit (VC) is carrying. Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP.
VC-based Multiplexing
In this case, by prior mutual agreement, each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit; for example, VC1 carries IP, etc. VC-based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical.
LLC-based Multiplexing
In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header. Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead, this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol, for example, if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs.
6.3.3 VPI and VCI
Be sure to use the correct Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) and Virtual Channel
Identifier (VCI) numbers assigned to you. The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 and for the VCI is 32 to 65535 (0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic). Please see the appendix for more information.
6.3.4 IP Address Assignment
A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you. A dynamic IP is not fixed; the ISP assigns you a different one each time. The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP.
IP Assignment with PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation
If you have a dynamic IP, then the IP Address and Gateway IP Address fields are not applicable (N/A). If you have a static IP, then you only need to fill in the IP
Address field and not the Gateway IP Address field.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
87
Chapter 6 Broadband
6.3.5 NAT
NAT (Network Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network.
6.3.6 Traffic Shaping
Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network. This agreement helps eliminate congestion, which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections.
Peak Cell Rate (PCR) is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells. This parameter may be lower (but not higher) than the maximum line speed. 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes (424 bits), so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum
PCR of 1962 cells/sec. This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed.
Sustained Cell Rate (SCR) is the mean cell rate of each bursty traffic source. It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection. SCR may not be greater than the PCR.
Maximum Burst Size (MBS) is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR. After MBS is reached, cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again. At this time, more cells (up to the MBS) can be sent at the PCR again.
If the PCR, SCR or MBS is set to the default of "0", the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate.
The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR, SCR and MBS.
Figure 22 Example of Traffic Shaping
88
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 6 Broadband
6.3.7 ATM Traffic Classes
These are the basic ATM traffic classes defined by the ATM Forum Traffic
Management 4.0 Specification.
Constant Bit Rate (CBR)
Constant Bit Rate (CBR) provides fixed bandwidth that is always available even if no data is being sent. CBR traffic is generally time-sensitive (doesn't tolerate delay). CBR is used for connections that continuously require a specific amount of bandwidth. A PCR is specified and if traffic exceeds this rate, cells may be dropped. Examples of connections that need CBR would be high-resolution video and voice.
Variable Bit Rate (VBR)
The Variable Bit Rate (VBR) ATM traffic class is used with bursty connections.
Connections that use the Variable Bit Rate (VBR) traffic class can be grouped into real time (VBR-RT) or non-real time (VBR-nRT) connections.
The VBR-RT (real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It also provides a fixed amount of bandwidth (a PCR is specified) but is only available when data is being sent. An example of an VBR-RT connection would be video conferencing. Video conferencing requires real-time data transfers and the bandwidth requirement varies in proportion to the video image's changing dynamics.
The VBR-nRT (non real-time Variable Bit Rate) type is used with bursty connections that do not require closely controlled delay and delay variation. It is commonly used for "bursty" traffic typical on LANs. PCR and MBS define the burst levels, SCR defines the minimum level. An example of an VBR-nRT connection would be non-time sensitive data file transfers.
Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR)
The Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) ATM traffic class is for bursty data transfers.
However, UBR doesn't guarantee any bandwidth and only delivers traffic when the network has spare bandwidth. An example application is background file transfer.
6.3.8 Introduction to VLANs
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks. Devices on a logical network belong to one group. A device can belong to more than one group. With VLAN, a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group(s); the traffic must first go through a router.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
89
Chapter 6 Broadband
In Multi-Tenant Unit (MTU) applications, VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers. When properly configured, VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN, thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building.
VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain. In traditional switched environments, all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port. With VLAN, all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain.
Introduction to IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN
A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag (VLAN ID) in the MAC header to identify the
VLAN membership of a frame across bridges - they are not confined to the switch on which they were created. The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network. A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier), residing within the type/ length field of the Ethernet frame) and two bytes of TCI (Tag Control Information), starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame).
The CFI (Canonical Format Indicator) is a single-bit flag, always set to zero for
Ethernet switches. If a frame received at an Ethernet port has a CFI set to 1, then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port. The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID, giving a possible maximum number of 4,096
VLANs. Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other. A frame with VID (VLAN Identifier) of null (0) is called a priority frame, meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame. Of the 4096 possible VIDs, a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 (FFF) is reserved, so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4,094.
TPID User Priority
2 Bytes 3 Bits
CFI
1 Bit
VLAN ID
12 Bits
90
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 7
Wireless
7.1 Overview
This chapter describes the ZyXEL Device’s Network Settings > Wireless screens. Use these screens to set up your ZyXEL Device’s wireless connection.
7.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
This section describes the ZyXEL Device’s Wireless screens. Use these screens to set up your ZyXEL Device’s wireless connection.
• Use the General screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select
the wireless security mode ( Section 7.2 on page 92
).
• Use the More AP screen to set up multiple wireless networks on your ZyXEL
Device ( Section 7.3 on page 101 ).
• Use the MAC Authentication screen to allow or deny wireless clients based on
their MAC addresses from connecting to the ZyXEL Device ( Section 7.4 on page
• Use the WPS screen to enable or disable WPS, view or generate a security PIN
(Personal Identification Number) (
• Use the WMM screen to enable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) to ensure quality of service in wireless networks for multimedia applications (
• Use the WDS screen to set up a Wireless Distribution System, in which the
ZyXEL Device acts as a bridge with other ZyXEL access points ( Section 7.7 on page 107 ).
• Use the Others screen to configure wireless advanced features, such as the
RTS/CTS Threshold (
91
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
7.1.2 What You Need to Know
Wireless Basics
“Wireless” is essentially radio communication. In the same way that walkie-talkie radios send and receive information over the airwaves, wireless networking devices exchange information with one another. A wireless networking device is just like a radio that lets your computer exchange information with radios attached to other computers. Like walkie-talkies, most wireless networking devices operate at radio frequency bands that are open to the public and do not require a license to use. However, wireless networking is different from that of most traditional radio communications in that there a number of wireless networking standards available with different methods of data encryption.
Finding Out More
See Section 7.9 on page 111 for advanced technical information on wireless
networks.
7.2 The General Screen
Use this screen to enable the Wireless LAN, enter the SSID and select the wireless security mode.
Note: If you are configuring the ZyXEL Device from a computer connected to the wireless LAN and you change the ZyXEL Device’s SSID, channel or security settings, you will lose your wireless connection when you press Apply to confirm. You must then change the wireless settings of your computer to match the ZyXEL Device’s new settings.
92
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
Click Network Settings > Wireless to open the General screen.
Figure 23 Network Settings > Wireless > General
The following table describes the general wireless LAN labels in this screen.
Table 9 Network Settings > Wireless > General
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Wireless Network Setup
Wireless
Channel
You can Enable or Disable the wireless LAN in this field.
Set the channel depending on your particular region.
Select a channel or use Auto to have the ZyXEL Device automatically determine a channel to use. If you are having problems with wireless interference, changing the channel may help. Try to use a channel that is as many channels away from any channels used by neighboring APs as possible. The channel number which the ZyXEL Device is currently using then displays next to this field.
more.../less Click more... to show more information. Click less to hide them.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
93
Chapter 7 Wireless
Table 9 Network Settings > Wireless > General
LABEL
Passphrase
Type
DESCRIPTION
If you set security for the wireless LAN and have the ZyXEL Device generate a password, the setting in this field determines how the ZyXEL
Device generates the password.
Passphrase
Key
Bandwidth
Select None to set the ZyXEL Device’s password generation to not be based on a passphrase.
Select Fixed to use a 16 character passphrase for generating a password.
Select Variable to use a 16 to 63 character passphrase for generating a password.
For a fixed type passphrase enter 16 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, with no spaces). It must contain both letters and numbers and is casesensitive.
For a variable type passphrase enter 16 to 63 alphanumeric characters (0-
9, A-Z, with no spaces). It must contain both letters and numbers and is case-sensitive.
Select whether the ZyXEL Device uses a wireless channel width of 20MHz or 40MHz.
A standard 20MHz channel offers transfer speeds of up to 150Mbps whereas a 40MHz channel uses two standard channels and offers speeds of up to 300 Mbps.
Hide SSID
Client
Isolation
40MHz (channel bonding or dual channel) bonds two adjacent radio channels to increase throughput. The wireless clients must also support 40
MHz. It is often better to use the 20 MHz setting in a location where the environment hinders the wireless signal.
Control
Sideband
Select 20MHz if you want to lessen radio interference with other wireless devices in your neighborhood or the wireless clients do not support channel bonding.
This is available for some regions when you select a specific channel and set the Bandwidth field to 40MHz. Set whether the control channel (set in the Channel field) should be in the Lower or Upper range of channel bands.
Wireless Network Settings
Wireless
Network
Name (SSID)
The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID.
Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN.
Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.
Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with each other through the ZyXEL Device.
94
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
Table 9 Network Settings > Wireless > General
LABEL
MBSSID/LAN
Isolation
DESCRIPTION
Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with clients in other SSIDs or wired LAN devices through the ZyXEL
Device.
Enhanced
Multicast
Forwarding
Security Level
Security
Mode
Select both Client Isolation and MBSSID/LAN Isolation to allow this
SSID’s wireless clients to only connect to the Internet through the ZyXEL
Device.
Select this check box to allow the ZyXEL Device to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless unicast traffic.
Select Basic (WEP) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK, WPA(2)) to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the
ZyXEL Device. When you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen.
Apply
Cancel
Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication.
See the following sections for more details about this field.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
7.2.1 No Security
Select No Security to allow wireless stations to communicate with the access points without any data encryption or authentication.
Note: If you do not enable any wireless security on your ZyXEL Device, your network is accessible to any wireless networking device that is within range.
Figure 24 Wireless > General: No Security
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
95
Chapter 7 Wireless
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 10 Wireless > General: No Security
LABEL
Security
Level
DESCRIPTION
Choose No Security from the drop-down list box.
7.2.2 Basic (WEP Encryption)
WEP encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points (AP) to keep network communications private. Both the wireless stations and the access points must use the same WEP key.
Note: WEP is extremely insecure. Its encryption can be broken by an attacker, using widely-available software. It is strongly recommended that you use a more effective security mechanism. Use the strongest security mechanism that all the wireless devices in your network support. For example, use WPA-PSK or
WPA2-PSK if all your wireless devices support it, or use WPA or WPA2 if your wireless devices support it and you have a RADIUS server. If your wireless devices support nothing stronger than WEP, use the highest encryption level available.
Your ZyXEL Device allows you to configure up to four 64-bit or 128-bit WEP keys but only one key can be enabled at any one time.
In order to configure and enable WEP encryption, click Network Settings >
Wireless to display the General screen, then select Basic as the security level.
Figure 25 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP)
96
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 11 Wireless > General: Basic (WEP)
LABEL
Security
Level
DESCRIPTION
Select Basic to enable WEP data encryption.
Generate password automatically
Password
1~4
Select this option to have the ZyXEL Device automatically generate a password. The password field will not be configurable when you select this option.
The password (WEP keys) are used to encrypt data. Both the ZyXEL
Device and the wireless stations must use the same password (WEP key) for data transmission.
If you chose 64-bit WEP, then enter any 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F").
If you chose 128-bit WEP, then enter 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters ("0-9", "A-F").
You must configure at least one password, only one password can be activated at any one time. The default password is Passowrd 1.
more.../less Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them.
WEP
Encryption
Select 64-bits or 128-bits.
This dictates the length of the security key that the network is going to use.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
97
Chapter 7 Wireless
7.2.3 More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK)
The WPA-PSK security mode provides both improved data encryption and user authentication over WEP. Using a Pre-Shared Key (PSK), both the ZyXEL Device and the connecting client share a common password in order to validate the connection. This type of encryption, while robust, is not as strong as WPA, WPA2 or even WPA2-PSK. The WPA2-PSK security mode is a newer, more robust version of the WPA encryption standard. It offers slightly better security, although the use of PSK makes it less robust than it could be.
Click Network Settings > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More
Secure as the security level. Then select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the
Security Mode list.
Figure 26 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK
98
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 12 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK
LABEL
Security Level
Security Mode
Generate password automatically
Password
DESCRIPTION
Select More Secure to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption.
Select WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK from the drop-down list box.
Select this option to have the ZyXEL Device automatically generate a password. The password field will not be configurable when you select this option.
The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials.
more.../less
Type a pre-shared key from 8 to 64 case-sensitive keyboard characters.
Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
Table 12 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)-PSK
LABEL
WPA-PSK
Compatible
DESCRIPTION
This field appears when you choose WPA-PSK2 as the Security Mode.
Encryption
Check this field to allow wireless devices using WPA-PSK security mode to connect to your ZyXEL Device. The ZyXEL Device supports
WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK simultaneously.
Select the encryption type (AES or TKIP+AES) for data encryption.
Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES.
Group Key
Update Timer
Select TKIP+AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or
AES.
The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group key out to all clients.
7.2.4 WPA(2) Authentication
The WPA2 security mode is currently the most robust form of encryption for wireless networks. It requires a RADIUS server to authenticate user credentials and is a full implementation the security protocol. Use this security option for maximum protection of your network. However, it is the least backwards compatible with older devices.
The WPA security mode is a security subset of WPA2. It requires the presence of a
RADIUS server on your network in order to validate user credentials. This encryption standard is slightly older than WPA2 and therefore is more compatible with older devices.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
99
Chapter 7 Wireless
Click Network Settings > Wireless to display the General screen. Select More
Secure as the security level. Then select WPA or WPA2 from the Security Mode list.
Figure 27 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)
100
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 13 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)
LABEL
Security Level
Security Mode
DESCRIPTION
Select More Secure to enable WPA(2)-PSK data encryption.
Choose WPA or WPA2 from the drop-down list box.
Authentication Server
IP Address Enter the IP address of the external authentication server in dotted decimal notation.
Port Number Enter the port number of the external authentication server. The default port number is 1812.
You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so with additional information.
Shared Secret Enter a password (up to 31 alphanumeric characters) as the key to be shared between the external authentication server and the ZyXEL
Device.
The key must be the same on the external authentication server and your ZyXEL Device. The key is not sent over the network. more.../less Click more... to show more fields in this section. Click less to hide them.
WPA Compatible This field is only available for WPA2. Select this if you want the ZyXEL
Device to support WPA and WPA2 simultaneously.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
Table 13 Wireless > General: More Secure: WPA(2)
LABEL
Encryption
DESCRIPTION
Select the encryption type (AES or TKIP+AES) for data encryption.
Select AES if your wireless clients can all use AES.
Select TKIP+AES to allow the wireless clients to use either TKIP or
AES.
This field is available only when you select WPA2.
WPA2 Pre-
Authentication
Network Re-auth
Interval
Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client
(already connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it. Select Enabled to turn on preauthentication in WAP2. Otherwise, select Disabled.
Specify how often wireless stations have to resend usernames and passwords in order to stay connected.
Group Key
Update Timer
If wireless station authentication is done using a RADIUS server, the reauthentication timer on the RADIUS server has priority.
The Group Key Update Timer is the rate at which the RADIUS server sends a new group key out to all clients.
7.3 The More AP Screen
This screen allows you to enable and configure multiple Basic Service Sets (BSSs) on the ZyXEL Device.
Click Network Settings > Wireless > More AP. The following screen displays.
Figure 28 Network Settings > Wireless > More AP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 14 Network Settings > Wireless > More AP
LABEL
#
Status
DESCRIPTION
This is the index number of the entry.
This field indicates whether this SSID is active. A yellow bulb signifies that this SSID is active. A gray bulb signifies that this SSID is not active.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
101
Chapter 7 Wireless
Table 14 Network Settings > Wireless > More AP
LABEL
SSID
DESCRIPTION
An SSID profile is the set of parameters relating to one of the ZyXEL
Device’s BSSs. The SSID (Service Set IDentifier) identifies the Service
Set with which a wireless device is associated.
Security
This field displays the name of the wireless profile on the network. When a wireless client scans for an AP to associate with, this is the name that is broadcast and seen in the wireless client utility.
This field indicates the security mode of the SSID profile.
7.3.1 Edit More AP
Use this screen to edit an SSID profile. Click the Edit icon next to an SSID in the
More AP screen. The following screen displays.
Figure 29 More AP: Edit
102
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 15 More AP: Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Wireless Network Setup
Wireless You can Enable or Disable the wireless LAN in this field.
Wireless Network Settings
Wireless Network
Name (SSID)
The SSID (Service Set IDentity) identifies the service set with which a wireless device is associated. Wireless devices associating to the access point (AP) must have the same SSID.
Enter a descriptive name (up to 32 English keyboard characters) for the wireless LAN.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
Table 15 More AP: Edit
LABEL
Hide SSID
Client Isolation
MBSSID/LAN
Isolation
Enhanced Multicast
Forwarding
Security Level
Security Mode
DESCRIPTION
Select this check box to hide the SSID in the outgoing beacon frame so a station cannot obtain the SSID through scanning using a site survey tool.
Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with each other.
Select this to keep the wireless clients in this SSID from communicating with clients in other SSIDs or LAN devices.
Select this check box to allow the ZyXEL Device to convert wireless multicast traffic into wireless unicast traffic.
Select Basic (WEP) or More Secure (WPA(2)-PSK, WPA(2)) to add security on this wireless network. The wireless clients which want to associate to this network must have same wireless security settings as the ZyXEL Device. After you select to use a security, additional options appears in this screen.
Apply
Cancel
Or you can select No Security to allow any client to associate this network without any data encryption or authentication.
for more details about this field.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
7.4 MAC Authentication
This screen allows you to configure the ZyXEL Device to give exclusive access to specific devices (Allow) or exclude specific devices from accessing the ZyXEL
Device (Deny). Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the
MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
103
Chapter 7 Wireless
Use this screen to view your ZyXEL Device’s MAC filter settings and add new MAC filter rules. Click Wireless > MAC Authentication. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 30 Wireless > MAC Authentication
104
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 16 Wireless > MAC Authentication
LABEL
SSID
MAC Restrict
Mode
DESCRIPTION
Select the SSID for which you want to configure MAC filter settings.
Define the filter action for the list of MAC addresses in the MAC Address table.
Select Disable to turn off MAC filtering.
Add new
MAC address
Select Deny to block access to the ZyXEL Device. MAC addresses not listed will be allowed to access the ZyXEL Device.
Select Allow to permit access to the ZyXEL Device. MAC addresses not listed will be denied access to the ZyXEL Device.
Click this if you want to add a new MAC address entry to the MAC filter list below.
#
MAC
Address
Modify
Apply
Cancel
Enter the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the ZyXEL Device in these address fields. Enter the MAC addresses in a valid MAC address format, that is, six hexadecimal character pairs, for example, 12:34:56:78:9a:bc.
This is the index number of the entry.
This is the MAC addresses of the wireless devices that are allowed or denied access to the ZyXEL Device.
Click the Delete icon to delete the entry.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
7.5 The WPS Screen
Use this screen to configure WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) on your ZyXEL Device.
WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Set up each WPS connection
Note: The ZyXEL Device applies the security settings of the SSID1 profile (see
). If you want to use the WPS feature, make sure you have set the security mode of SSID1 to WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK or No Security.
Click Network Settings > Wireless > WPS. The following screen displays.
Select Enable and click Apply to activate the WPS function. Then you can configure the WPS settings in this screen.
Figure 31 Network Settings > Wireless > WPS
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 17 Network Settings > Wireless > WPS
LABEL
Enable WPS
Method 1
DESCRIPTION
Select Enable to activate WPS on the ZyXEL Device.
Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network using Push Button
Configuration (PBC).
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
105
Chapter 7 Wireless
Table 17 Network Settings > Wireless > WPS
LABEL
Connect
DESCRIPTION
Click this button to add another WPS-enabled wireless device (within wireless range of the ZyXEL Device) to your wireless network. This button may either be a physical button on the outside of device, or a menu button similar to the Connect button on this screen.
Method 2
Register
Note: You must press the other wireless device’s WPS button within two minutes of pressing this button.
Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the client into the ZyXEL Device.
Enter the PIN of the device that you are setting up a WPS connection with and click Register to authenticate and add the wireless device to your wireless network.
You can find the PIN either on the outside of the device, or by checking the device’s settings.
Method 3
Release
Configuration
Generate
New PIN
Number
Apply
Cancel
Note: You must also activate WPS on that device within two minutes to have it present its PIN to the ZyXEL Device.
Use this section to set up a WPS wireless network by entering the PIN of the ZyXEL Device into the client.
The default WPS status is configured.
Click this button to remove all configured wireless and wireless security settings for WPS connections on the ZyXEL Device.
The PIN (Personal Identification Number) of the ZyXEL Device is shown here. Enter this PIN in the configuration utility of the device you want to connect to using WPS.
The PIN is not necessary when you use WPS push-button method.
Click the Generate New PIN Number button to have the ZyXEL
Device create a new PIN.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
7.6 The WMM Screen
Use this screen to enable Wi-Fi MultiMedia (WMM) and WMM Power Save in wireless networks for multimedia applications.
106
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
Click Network Settings > Wireless > WMM. The following screen displays.
Figure 32 Network Settings > Wireless > WMM
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 18 Network Settings > Wireless > WMM
LABEL
WMM
WMM Power
Save
DESCRIPTION
Select On to have the ZyXEL Device automatically give a service a priority level according to the ToS value in the IP header of packets it sends. WMM QoS (Wifi MultiMedia Quality of Service) gives high priority to voice and video, which makes them run more smoothly.
Select this option to extend the battery life of your mobile devices
(especially useful for small devices that are running multimedia applications). The ZyXEL Device goes to sleep mode to save power when it is not transmitting data. The AP buffers the packets sent to the ZyXEL
Device until the ZyXEL Device "wakes up". The ZyXEL Device wakes up periodically to check for incoming data.
Apply
Cancel
Note: Note: This works only if the wireless device to which the
ZyXEL Device is connected also supports this feature.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
7.7 The WDS Screen
An AP using the Wireless Distribution System (WDS) can function as a wireless network bridge allowing you to wirelessly connect two wired network segments.
The WDS screen allows you to configure the ZyXEL Device to connect to two or more APs wirelessly when WDS is enabled.
Use this screen to set up your WDS (Wireless Distribution System) links between the ZyXEL Device and other wireless APs. You need to know the MAC address of the peer device. Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made.
Note: WDS security is independent of the security settings between the ZyXEL
Device and any wireless clients.
Note: At the time of writing, WDS is compatible with other ZyXEL APs only. Not all models support WDS links. Check your other AP’s documentation.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
107
Chapter 7 Wireless
Click Network Settings > Wireless > WDS. The following screen displays.
Figure 33 Network Settings > Wireless > WDS
108
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 19 Network Settings > Wireless > WDS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Wireless Bridge Setup
AP Mode Select the operating mode for your ZyXEL Device.
• Access Point - The ZyXEL Device functions as a bridge and access point simultaneously.
• Wireless Bridge - The ZyXEL Device acts as a wireless network bridge and establishes wireless links with other APs. In this mode, clients cannot connect to the ZyXEL Device wirelessly.
Bridge Restrict This field is available only when you set operating mode to Access
Point.
Remote Bridge
MAC Address
#
MAC Address
Select Enabled to turn on WDS and enter the peer device’s MAC address manually in the table below. Select Disable to turn off WDS.
You can enter the MAC address of the peer device by clicking the Edit icon under Modify.
This is the index number of the entry.
This shows the MAC address of the peer device.
Modify
You can connect to up to 4 peer devices.
Click the Edit icon and type the MAC address of the peer device in a valid MAC address format (six hexadecimal character pairs, for example
12:34:56:78:9a:bc).
Click the Delete icon to remove this entry.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
Table 19 Network Settings > Wireless > WDS
LABEL
Scan
Apply
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
Click the Scan icon to search and display the available APs within range.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
7.7.1 WDS Scan
You can click the Scan icon in Wireless > WDS to have the ZyXEL Device automatically search and display the available APs within range. Select an AP and click Apply to have the ZyXEL Device establish a wireless link with the selected wireless device.
Figure 34 WDS: Scan
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 20 WDS: Scan
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Wireless Bridge Scan Setup
Refresh Click Refresh to update the table.
#
SSID
BSSID
This is the index number of the entry.
This shows the SSID of the available wireless device within range.
This shows the MAC address of the available wireless device within range.
Apply
Cancel
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
109
Chapter 7 Wireless
7.8 The Others Screen
Use this screen to configure advanced wireless settings. Click Network Settings
> Wireless > Others. The screen appears as shown.
See Section 7.9.2 on page 113 for detailed definitions of the terms listed in this
screen.
Figure 35 Network Settings > Wireless > Others
110
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 21 Network Settings > Wireless > Others
LABEL
RTS/CTS
Threshold
DESCRIPTION
Data with its frame size larger than this value will perform the RTS
(Request To Send)/CTS (Clear To Send) handshake.
Fragmentation
Threshold
Auto Channel
Timer
Enter a value between 0 and 2347.
This is the maximum data fragment size that can be sent. Enter a value between 256 and 2346.
If you set the channel to Auto in the Network Settings > Wireless >
General screen, specify the interval in minutes for how often the ZyXEL
Device scans for the best channel. Enter 0 to disable the periodical scan.
Output Power Set the output power of the ZyXEL Device. If there is a high density of
APs in an area, decrease the output power to reduce interference with other APs. Select one of the following: 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% or
100%.
Beacon
Interval
When a wirelessly networked device sends a beacon, it includes with it a beacon interval. This specifies the time period before the device sends the beacon again.
The interval tells receiving devices on the network how long they can wait in low power mode before waking up to handle the beacon. This value can be set from20ms to 1000ms. A high value helps save current consumption of the access point.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
Table 21 Network Settings > Wireless > Others
LABEL DESCRIPTION
DTIM Interval Delivery Traffic Indication Message (DTIM) is the time period after which broadcast and multicast packets are transmitted to mobile clients in the
Power Saving mode. A high DTIM value can cause clients to lose connectivity with the network. This value can be set from 1 to 100.
802.11 Mode Select 802.11b Only to allow only IEEE 802.11b compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device.
802.11
Protection
Preamble
Back
Apply
Cancel
Select 802.11g Only to allow only IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device.
Select 802.11n Only to allow only IEEE 802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device.
Select 802.11b/g Mixed to allow either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL Device. The transmission rate of your ZyXEL Device might be reduced.
Select 802.11b/g/n Mixed to allow IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g or
IEEE802.11n compliant WLAN devices to associate with the ZyXEL
Device. The transmission rate of your ZyXEL Device might be reduced.
Enabling this feature can help prevent collisions in mixed-mode networks
(networks with both IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g traffic).
Select Auto to have the wireless devices transmit data after a RTS/CTS handshake. This helps improve IEEE 802.11g performance.
Select Off to disable 802.11 protection. The transmission rate of your
ZyXEL Device might be reduced in a mixed-mode network.
This field displays Off and is not configurable when you set 802.11
Mode to 802.11b Only.
Select a preamble type from the drop-down list box. Choices are Long or
Short. See
Section 7.9.7 on page 119 for more information.
This field is configurable only when you set 802.11 Mode to 802.11b.
Click this to return to the previous screen without saving.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
7.9 Technical Reference
This section discusses wireless LANs in depth. For more information, see the appendix.
7.9.1 Wireless Network Overview
Wireless networks consist of wireless clients, access points and bridges.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
111
Chapter 7 Wireless
• A wireless client is a radio connected to a user’s computer.
• An access point is a radio with a wired connection to a network, which can connect with numerous wireless clients and let them access the network.
• A bridge is a radio that relays communications between access points and wireless clients, extending a network’s range.
Traditionally, a wireless network operates in one of two ways.
• An “infrastructure” type of network has one or more access points and one or more wireless clients. The wireless clients connect to the access points.
• An “ad-hoc” type of network is one in which there is no access point. Wireless clients connect to one another in order to exchange information.
The following figure provides an example of a wireless network.
Figure 36 Example of a Wireless Network
112
The wireless network is the part in the blue circle. In this wireless network, devices A and B use the access point (AP) to interact with the other devices (such as the printer) or with the Internet. Your ZyXEL Device is the AP.
Every wireless network must follow these basic guidelines.
• Every device in the same wireless network must use the same SSID.
The SSID is the name of the wireless network. It stands for Service Set
IDentifier.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
• If two wireless networks overlap, they should use a different channel.
Like radio stations or television channels, each wireless network uses a specific channel, or frequency, to send and receive information.
• Every device in the same wireless network must use security compatible with the AP.
Security stops unauthorized devices from using the wireless network. It can also protect the information that is sent in the wireless network.
Radio Channels
In the radio spectrum, there are certain frequency bands allocated for unlicensed, civilian use. For the purposes of wireless networking, these bands are divided into numerous channels. This allows a variety of networks to exist in the same place without interfering with one another. When you create a network, you must select a channel to use.
Since the available unlicensed spectrum varies from one country to another, the number of available channels also varies.
7.9.2 Additional Wireless Terms
The following table describes some wireless network terms and acronyms used in the ZyXEL Device’s Web Configurator.
Table 22 Additional Wireless Terms
TERM DESCRIPTION
RTS/CTS Threshold In a wireless network which covers a large area, wireless devices are sometimes not aware of each other’s presence. This may cause them to send information to the AP at the same time and result in information colliding and not getting through.
Preamble
Authentication
Fragmentation
Threshold
By setting this value lower than the default value, the wireless devices must sometimes get permission to send information to the
ZyXEL Device. The lower the value, the more often the devices must get permission.
If this value is greater than the fragmentation threshold value (see below), then wireless devices never have to get permission to send information to the ZyXEL Device.
A preamble affects the timing in your wireless network. There are two preamble modes: long and short.
If a device uses a different preamble mode than the ZyXEL Device does, it cannot communicate with the ZyXEL Device.
The process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network.
A small fragmentation threshold is recommended for busy networks, while a larger threshold provides faster performance if the network is not very busy.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
113
Chapter 7 Wireless
7.9.3 Wireless Security Overview
By their nature, radio communications are simple to intercept. For wireless data networks, this means that anyone within range of a wireless network without security can not only read the data passing over the airwaves, but also join the network. Once an unauthorized person has access to the network, he or she can steal information or introduce malware (malicious software) intended to compromise the network. For these reasons, a variety of security systems have been developed to ensure that only authorized people can use a wireless data network, or understand the data carried on it.
These security standards do two things. First, they authenticate. This means that only people presenting the right credentials (often a username and password, or a
“key” phrase) can access the network. Second, they encrypt. This means that the information sent over the air is encoded. Only people with the code key can understand the information, and only people who have been authenticated are given the code key.
These security standards vary in effectiveness. Some can be broken, such as the old Wired Equivalent Protocol (WEP). Using WEP is better than using no security at all, but it will not keep a determined attacker out. Other security standards are secure in themselves but can be broken if a user does not use them properly. For example, the WPA-PSK security standard is very secure if you use a long key which is difficult for an attacker’s software to guess - for example, a twenty-letter long string of apparently random numbers and letters - but it is not very secure if you use a short key which is very easy to guess - for example, a three-letter word from the dictionary.
Because of the damage that can be done by a malicious attacker, it’s not just people who have sensitive information on their network who should use security.
Everybody who uses any wireless network should ensure that effective security is in place.
A good way to come up with effective security keys, passwords and so on is to use obscure information that you personally will easily remember, and to enter it in a way that appears random and does not include real words. For example, if your mother owns a 1970 Dodge Challenger and her favorite movie is Vanishing Point
(which you know was made in 1971) you could use “70dodchal71vanpoi” as your security key.
The following sections introduce different types of wireless security you can set up in the wireless network.
7.9.3.1 SSID
Normally, the ZyXEL Device acts like a beacon and regularly broadcasts the SSID in the area. You can hide the SSID instead, in which case the ZyXEL Device does
114
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless not broadcast the SSID. In addition, you should change the default SSID to something that is difficult to guess.
This type of security is fairly weak, however, because there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the SSID. In addition, unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network.
7.9.3.2 MAC Address Filter
Every device that can use a wireless network has a unique identification number, called a MAC address.
1 A MAC address is usually written using twelve hexadecimal characters 2 ; for example, 00A0C5000002 or 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. To get the MAC address for each device in the wireless network, see the device’s User’s Guide or other documentation.
You can use the MAC address filter to tell the ZyXEL Device which devices are allowed or not allowed to use the wireless network. If a device is allowed to use the wireless network, it still has to have the correct information (SSID, channel, and security). If a device is not allowed to use the wireless network, it does not matter if it has the correct information.
This type of security does not protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless devices to get the
MAC address of an authorized device. Then, they can use that MAC address to use the wireless network.
7.9.3.3 User Authentication
Authentication is the process of verifying whether a wireless device is allowed to use the wireless network. You can make every user log in to the wireless network before using it. However, every device in the wireless network has to support IEEE
802.1x to do this.
For wireless networks, you can store the user names and passwords for each user in a RADIUS server. This is a server used in businesses more than in homes. If you do not have a RADIUS server, you cannot set up user names and passwords for your users.
Unauthorized wireless devices can still see the information that is sent in the wireless network, even if they cannot use the wireless network. Furthermore, there are ways for unauthorized wireless users to get a valid user name and password. Then, they can use that user name and password to use the wireless network.
1.
Some wireless devices, such as scanners, can detect wireless networks but cannot use wireless networks.
These kinds of wireless devices might not have MAC addresses.
2.
Hexadecimal characters are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
115
Chapter 7 Wireless
7.9.3.4 Encryption
Wireless networks can use encryption to protect the information that is sent in the wireless network. Encryption is like a secret code. If you do not know the secret code, you cannot understand the message.
The types of encryption you can choose depend on the type of authentication.
(See
for information about this.)
Table 23 Types of Encryption for Each Type of Authentication
Weakest
NO AUTHENTICATION RADIUS SERVER
No Security WPA
Static WEP
WPA-PSK
Strongest WPA2-PSK WPA2
For example, if the wireless network has a RADIUS server, you can choose WPA or WPA2. If users do not log in to the wireless network, you can choose no encryption, Static WEP, WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK.
Usually, you should set up the strongest encryption that every device in the wireless network supports. For example, suppose you have a wireless network with the ZyXEL Device and you do not have a RADIUS server. Therefore, there is no authentication. Suppose the wireless network has two devices. Device A only supports WEP, and device B supports WEP and WPA. Therefore, you should set up
Static WEP in the wireless network.
Note: It is recommended that wireless networks use WPA-PSK, WPA, or stronger encryption. The other types of encryption are better than none at all, but it is still possible for unauthorized wireless devices to figure out the original information pretty quickly.
When you select WPA2 or WPA2-PSK in your ZyXEL Device, you can also select an option (WPA compatible) to support WPA as well. In this case, if some of the devices support WPA and some support WPA2, you should set up WPA2-PSK or
WPA2 (depending on the type of wireless network login) and select the WPA
compatible option in the ZyXEL Device.
Many types of encryption use a key to protect the information in the wireless network. The longer the key, the stronger the encryption. Every device in the wireless network must have the same key.
116
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
7.9.4 Signal Problems
Because wireless networks are radio networks, their signals are subject to limitations of distance, interference and absorption.
Problems with distance occur when the two radios are too far apart. Problems with interference occur when other radio waves interrupt the data signal. Interference may come from other radio transmissions, such as military or air traffic control communications, or from machines that are coincidental emitters such as electric motors or microwaves. Problems with absorption occur when physical objects
(such as thick walls) are between the two radios, muffling the signal.
7.9.5 BSS
A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless stations or between a wireless station and a wired network client go through one access point (AP).
Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless stations in the BSS. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is disabled, wireless station A and B can access the wired network and communicate with each other. When Intra-BSS traffic blocking is enabled,
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
117
Chapter 7 Wireless wireless station A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other.
Figure 37 Basic Service set
7.9.6 MBSSID
Traditionally, you need to use different APs to configure different Basic Service
Sets (BSSs). As well as the cost of buying extra APs, there is also the possibility of channel interference. The ZyXEL Device’s MBSSID (Multiple Basic Service Set
IDentifier) function allows you to use one access point to provide several BSSs simultaneously. You can then assign varying QoS priorities and/or security modes to different SSIDs.
Wireless devices can use different BSSIDs to associate with the same AP.
7.9.6.1 Notes on Multiple BSSs
• A maximum of eight BSSs are allowed on one AP simultaneously.
• You must use different keys for different BSSs. If two wireless devices have different BSSIDs (they are in different BSSs), but have the same keys, they may hear each other’s communications (but not communicate with each other).
• MBSSID should not replace but rather be used in conjunction with 802.1x security.
118
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
7.9.7 Preamble Type
Preamble is used to signal that data is coming to the receiver. Short and long refer to the length of the synchronization field in a packet.
Short preamble increases performance as less time sending preamble means more time for sending data. All IEEE 802.11 compliant wireless adapters support long preamble, but not all support short preamble.
Use long preamble if you are unsure what preamble mode other wireless devices on the network support, and to provide more reliable communications in busy wireless networks.
Use short preamble if you are sure all wireless devices on the network support it, and to provide more efficient communications.
Use the dynamic setting to automatically use short preamble when all wireless devices on the network support it, otherwise the ZyXEL Device uses long preamble.
Note: The wireless devices MUST use the same preamble mode in order to communicate.
7.9.8 Wireless Distribution System (WDS)
The ZyXEL Device can act as a wireless network bridge and establish WDS
(Wireless Distribution System) links with other APs. You need to know the MAC addresses of the APs you want to link to. Once the security settings of peer sides match one another, the connection between devices is made.
At the time of writing, WDS security is compatible with other ZyXEL access points only. Refer to your other access point’s documentation for details.
The following figure illustrates how WDS link works between APs. Notebook computer A is a wireless client connecting to access point AP 1. AP 1 has no wired Internet connection, but it can establish a WDS link with access point AP 2, which has a wired Internet connection. When AP 1 has a WDS link with AP 2, the notebook computer can access the Internet through AP 2.
Figure 38 WDS Link Example
WDS
A
AP 1 AP 2
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
119
Chapter 7 Wireless
7.9.9 WiFi Protected Setup (WPS)
Your ZyXEL Device supports WiFi Protected Setup (WPS), which is an easy way to set up a secure wireless network. WPS is an industry standard specification, defined by the WiFi Alliance.
WPS allows you to quickly set up a wireless network with strong security, without having to configure security settings manually. Each WPS connection works between two devices. Both devices must support WPS (check each device’s documentation to make sure).
Depending on the devices you have, you can either press a button (on the device itself, or in its configuration utility) or enter a PIN (a unique Personal Identification
Number that allows one device to authenticate the other) in each of the two devices. When WPS is activated on a device, it has two minutes to find another device that also has WPS activated. Then, the two devices connect and set up a secure network by themselves.
7.9.9.1 Push Button Configuration
WPS Push Button Configuration (PBC) is initiated by pressing a button on each
WPS-enabled device, and allowing them to connect automatically. You do not need to enter any information.
Not every WPS-enabled device has a physical WPS button. Some may have a WPS
PBC button in their configuration utilities instead of or in addition to the physical button.
Take the following steps to set up WPS using the button.
1
Ensure that the two devices you want to set up are within wireless range of one another.
2
Look for a WPS button on each device. If the device does not have one, log into its configuration utility and locate the button (see the device’s User’s Guide for how to do this - for the ZyXEL Device, see
).
3
Press the button on one of the devices (it doesn’t matter which). For the ZyXEL
Device you must press the WPS button for more than three seconds.
4
Within two minutes, press the button on the other device. The registrar sends the network name (SSID) and security key through an secure connection to the enrollee.
If you need to make sure that WPS worked, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list,
WPS was successful.
120
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
7.9.9.2 PIN Configuration
Each WPS-enabled device has its own PIN (Personal Identification Number). This may either be static (it cannot be changed) or dynamic (in some devices you can generate a new PIN by clicking on a button in the configuration interface).
Use the PIN method instead of the push-button configuration (PBC) method if you want to ensure that the connection is established between the devices you specify, not just the first two devices to activate WPS in range of each other. However, you need to log into the configuration interfaces of both devices to use the PIN method.
When you use the PIN method, you must enter the PIN from one device (usually the wireless client) into the second device (usually the Access Point or wireless router). Then, when WPS is activated on the first device, it presents its PIN to the second device. If the PIN matches, one device sends the network and security information to the other, allowing it to join the network.
Take the following steps to set up a WPS connection between an access point or wireless router (referred to here as the AP) and a client device using the PIN method.
1
Ensure WPS is enabled on both devices.
2
Access the WPS section of the AP’s configuration interface. See the device’s User’s
Guide for how to do this.
3
Look for the client’s WPS PIN; it will be displayed either on the device, or in the
WPS section of the client’s configuration interface (see the device’s User’s Guide
for how to find the WPS PIN - for the ZyXEL Device, see Section 7.5 on page 105 ).
4
Enter the client’s PIN in the AP’s configuration interface.
5
If the client device’s configuration interface has an area for entering another device’s PIN, you can either enter the client’s PIN in the AP, or enter the AP’s PIN in the client - it does not matter which.
6
Start WPS on both devices within two minutes.
7
Use the configuration utility to activate WPS, not the push-button on the device itself.
8
On a computer connected to the wireless client, try to connect to the Internet. If you can connect, WPS was successful.
If you cannot connect, check the list of associated wireless clients in the AP’s configuration utility. If you see the wireless client in the list, WPS was successful.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
121
Chapter 7 Wireless
The following figure shows a WPS-enabled wireless client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to the WPS-enabled AP via the PIN method.
Figure 39 Example WPS Process: PIN Method
ENROLLEE
WPS
This device’s
WPS PIN: 123456
REGISTRAR
WPS
Enter WPS PIN from other device:
START
WPS
START
WPS
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
SECURE EAP TUNNEL
SSID
WPA(2)-PSK
COMMUNICATION
7.9.9.3 How WPS Works
When two WPS-enabled devices connect, each device must assume a specific role.
One device acts as the registrar (the device that supplies network and security settings) and the other device acts as the enrollee (the device that receives network and security settings. The registrar creates a secure EAP (Extensible
Authentication Protocol) tunnel and sends the network name (SSID) and the WPA-
PSK or WPA2-PSK pre-shared key to the enrollee. Whether WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK is used depends on the standards supported by the devices. If the registrar is already part of a network, it sends the existing information. If not, it generates the SSID and WPA(2)-PSK randomly.
122
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless
The following figure shows a WPS-enabled client (installed in a notebook computer) connecting to a WPS-enabled access point.
Figure 40 How WPS works
ACTIVATE
WPS
WITHIN 2 MINUTES
ACTIVATE
WPS
WPS HANDSHAKE
ENROLLEE REGISTRAR
SECURE TUNNEL
SECURITY INFO
COMMUNICATION
The roles of registrar and enrollee last only as long as the WPS setup process is active (two minutes). The next time you use WPS, a different device can be the registrar if necessary.
The WPS connection process is like a handshake; only two devices participate in each WPS transaction. If you want to add more devices you should repeat the process with one of the existing networked devices and the new device.
Note that the access point (AP) is not always the registrar, and the wireless client is not always the enrollee. All WPS-certified APs can be a registrar, and so can some WPS-enabled wireless clients.
By default, a WPS devices is “unconfigured”. This means that it is not part of an existing network and can act as either enrollee or registrar (if it supports both functions). If the registrar is unconfigured, the security settings it transmits to the enrollee are randomly-generated. Once a WPS-enabled device has connected to another device using WPS, it becomes “configured”. A configured wireless client can still act as enrollee or registrar in subsequent WPS connections, but a configured access point can no longer act as enrollee. It will be the registrar in all subsequent WPS connections in which it is involved. If you want a configured AP to act as an enrollee, you must reset it to its factory defaults.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
123
Chapter 7 Wireless
7.9.9.4 Example WPS Network Setup
This section shows how security settings are distributed in an example WPS setup.
The following figure shows an example network. In step 1, both AP1 and Client 1 are unconfigured. When WPS is activated on both, they perform the handshake. In this example, AP1 is the registrar, and Client 1 is the enrollee. The registrar randomly generates the security information to set up the network, since it is unconfigured and has no existing information.
Figure 41 WPS: Example Network Step 1
ENROLLEE REGISTRAR
SECURITY INFO
CLIENT 1 AP1
In step 2, you add another wireless client to the network. You know that Client 1 supports registrar mode, but it is better to use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new client since you must connect to the access point anyway in order to use the network. In this case, AP1 must be the registrar, since it is configured (it already has security information for the network). AP1 supplies the existing security information to Client 2.
Figure 42 WPS: Example Network Step 2
REGISTRAR
EXISTING CONNECTION
CLIENT 1 AP1
ENROLLEE
SE
CU
RIT
Y I
NF
O
CLIENT 2
In step 3, you add another access point (AP2) to your network. AP2 is out of range of AP1, so you cannot use AP1 for the WPS handshake with the new access
124
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 7 Wireless point. However, you know that Client 2 supports the registrar function, so you use it to perform the WPS handshake instead.
Figure 43 WPS: Example Network Step 3
EXISTING CONNECTION
CLIENT 1
EX
IST
ING
CO
NN
EC
TIO
N
AP1
REGISTRAR
CLIENT 2
ENROLLEE
SEC
URIT
Y IN
FO
AP2
7.9.9.5 Limitations of WPS
WPS has some limitations of which you should be aware.
• WPS works in Infrastructure networks only (where an AP and a wireless client communicate). It does not work in Ad-Hoc networks (where there is no AP).
• When you use WPS, it works between two devices only. You cannot enroll multiple devices simultaneously, you must enroll one after the other.
For instance, if you have two enrollees and one registrar you must set up the first enrollee (by pressing the WPS button on the registrar and the first enrollee, for example), then check that it successfully enrolled, then set up the second device in the same way.
• WPS works only with other WPS-enabled devices. However, you can still add non-WPS devices to a network you already set up using WPS.
WPS works by automatically issuing a randomly-generated WPA-PSK or WPA2-
PSK pre-shared key from the registrar device to the enrollee devices. Whether the network uses WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depends on the device. You can check the configuration interface of the registrar device to discover the key the network is using (if the device supports this feature). Then, you can enter the key into the non-WPS device and join the network as normal (the non-WPS device must also support WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK).
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
125
Chapter 7 Wireless
• When you use the PBC method, there is a short period (from the moment you press the button on one device to the moment you press the button on the other device) when any WPS-enabled device could join the network. This is because the registrar has no way of identifying the “correct” enrollee, and cannot differentiate between your enrollee and a rogue device. This is a possible way for a hacker to gain access to a network.
You can easily check to see if this has happened. WPS works between only two devices simultaneously, so if another device has enrolled your device will be unable to enroll, and will not have access to the network. If this happens, open the access point’s configuration interface and look at the list of associated clients (usually displayed by MAC address). It does not matter if the access point is the WPS registrar, the enrollee, or was not involved in the WPS handshake; a rogue device must still associate with the access point to gain access to the network. Check the MAC addresses of your wireless clients
(usually printed on a label on the bottom of the device). If there is an unknown
MAC address you can remove it or reset the AP.
126
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 8
Home Networking
8.1 Overview
A Local Area Network (LAN) is a shared communication system to which many networking devices are connected. It is usually located in one immediate area such as a building or floor of a building.
Use the LAN screens to help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses.
LAN
DSL
8.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the LAN Setup screen to set the LAN IP address, subnet mask, and DHCP settings of your ZyXEL device (
• Use the Static DHCP screen to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses (
).
• Use the UPnP screen to enable UPnP and UPnP NAT traversal on the ZyXEL
Device (
127
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Home Networking
8.1.2 What You Need To Know
8.1.2.1 About LAN
IP Address
IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device
(including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts.
Subnet Mask
Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network.
You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks.
DHCP
A DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server can assign your ZyXEL
Device an IP address, subnet mask, DNS and other routing information when it's turned on.
DNS
DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding
IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a networking device before you can access it.
8.1.2.2 About UPnP
Identifying UPnP Devices
UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder
(Windows XP). Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon. Selecting the icon of a UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device.
NAT Traversal
UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT. UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing, announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions. NAT traversal allows the following:
128
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Home Networking
• Dynamic port mapping
• Learning public IP addresses
• Assigning lease times to mappings
Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP.
See the
for more information on NAT.
Cautions with UPnP
The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues. Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments.
When a UPnP device joins a network, it announces its presence with a multicast message. For security reasons, the ZyXEL Device allows multicast messages on the LAN only.
All UPnP-enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration. Disable UPnP if this is not your intention.
UPnP and ZyXEL
ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum
UPnP™ Implementers Corp. (UIC). ZyXEL's UPnP implementation supports
Internet Gateway Device (IGD) 1.0.
See Section 8.5 on page 134 for examples of installing and using UPnP.
Finding Out More
See Section 8.7 on page 142 for technical background information on LANs.
8.1.3 Before You Begin
Find out the MAC addresses of your network devices if you intend to add them to the DHCP Client List screen.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
129
Chapter 8 Home Networking
8.2 The LAN Setup Screen
Use this screen to set the Local Area Network IP address and subnet mask of your
ZyXEL Device. Click Network Settings > Home Networking to open the LAN
Setup screen.
Follow these steps to configure your LAN settings.
1
Enter an IP address into the IP Address field. The IP address must be in dotted decimal notation. This will become the IP address of your ZyXEL Device.
2
Enter the IP subnet mask into the IP Subnet Mask field. Unless instructed otherwise it is best to leave this alone, the configurator will automatically compute a subnet mask based upon the IP address you entered.
3
Click Apply to save your settings.
Figure 44 Network Settings > Home Networking > LAN Setup
130
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Home Networking
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 24 Network Settings > Home Networking > LAN Setup
LABEL
Group Name
DESCRIPTION
Select the interface group name for which you want to configure LAN settings. See
Chapter 15 on page 211 for how to create a new
interface group.
LAN IP Setup
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Enter the LAN IP address you want to assign to your ZyXEL Device in dotted decimal notation, for example, 192.168.1.1 (factory default).
Type the subnet mask of your network in dotted decimal notation, for example 255.255.255.0 (factory default). Your ZyXEL Device automatically computes the subnet mask based on the IP Address you enter, so do not change this field unless you are instructed to do so.
DHCP Server State
DHCP Select Enable to have the ZyXEL Device act as a DHCP server or DHCP relay agent.
Select Disable to stop the DHCP server on the ZyXEL Device.
DHCP Relay
Server Address
IP Address
IP Addressing
Values
Beginning IP
Address
Ending IP
Address
DHCP Server
Lease Time
Select DHCP Relay to have the ZyXEL Device forward DHCP request to the DHCP server.
This field is only available when you select DHCP Relay in the DHCP field.
Enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server in this field.
This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field.
This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.
This field specifies the last of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool.
This is the period of time DHCP-assigned addresses is used. DHCP automatically assigns IP addresses to clients when they log in. DHCP centralizes IP address management on central computers that run the
DHCP server program. DHCP leases addresses, for a period of time, which means that past addresses are “recycled” and made available for future reassignment to other systems.
This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field.
Enter the lease time of the DHCP server.
Days/Hours/
Minutes
DNS Values
DNS
DNS Server 1
DNS Server 2
This field is only available when you select Enable in the DHCP field.
Select the type of service that you are registered for from your
Dynamic DNS service provider.
Select Dynamic if you have the Dynamic DNS service.
Select Static if you have the Static DNS service.
Enter the first and second DNS (Domain Name System) server IP address the ZyXEL Device passes to the DHCP clients.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
131
Chapter 8 Home Networking
Table 24 Network Settings > Home Networking > LAN Setup
LABEL
Apply
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
8.3 The Static DHCP Screen
This table allows you to assign IP addresses on the LAN to specific individual computers based on their MAC Addresses.
Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02.
Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device’s static DHCP settings. Click
Network Settings > Home Networking > Static DHCP to open the following screen.
Figure 45 Network Settings > Home Networking > Static DHCP
132
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 25 Network Settings > Home Networking > Static DHCP
LABEL
Add new static lease
#
Status
MAC Address
DESCRIPTION
Click this to add a new static DHCP entry.
This is the index number of the entry.
This field displays whether the client is connected to the ZyXEL Device.
The MAC (Media Access Control) or Ethernet address on a LAN (Local
Area Network) is unique to your computer (six pairs of hexadecimal notation).
IP Address
Modify
A network interface card such as an Ethernet adapter has a hardwired address that is assigned at the factory. This address follows an industry standard that ensures no other adapter has a similar address.
This field displays the IP address relative to the # field listed above.
Click the Edit icon to have the IP address field editable and change it.
Click the Delete icon to delete a static DHCP entry. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the selected entry.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Home Networking
If you click Add new static lease in the Static DHCP screen or the Edit icon next to a static DHCP entry, the following screen displays.
Figure 46 Static DHCP: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 26 Static DHCP: Add/Edit
LABEL
Active
MAC Address
IP Address
Apply
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
This field displays whether the client is connected to the ZyXEL Device.
Enter the MAC address of a computer on your LAN.
Enter the IP address that you want to assign to the computer on your
LAN with the MAC address that you will also specify.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
8.4 The UPnP Screen
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a distributed, open networking standard that uses TCP/IP for simple peer-to-peer network connectivity between devices. A
UPnP device can dynamically join a network, obtain an IP address, convey its capabilities and learn about other devices on the network. In turn, a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use.
See page 128 for more information on UPnP.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
133
Chapter 8 Home Networking
Use the following screen to configure the UPnP settings on your ZyXEL Device.
Click Network Settings > Home Networking > UPnP to display the screen shown next.
Figure 47 Network Settings > Home Networking > UPnP
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 27 Network Settings > Home Networking > UPnP
LABEL
UPnP
UPnP NAT-T
State
Apply
DESCRIPTION
Select Enable to activate UPnP. Be aware that anyone could use a
UPnP application to open the web configurator's login screen without entering the ZyXEL Device's IP address (although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator).
Select Enable to allow UPnP-enabled applications to automatically configure the ZyXEL Device so that they can communicate through the
ZyXEL Device by using NAT traversal. UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another
UPnP enabled device; this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application.
Click Apply to save your changes.
8.5 Installing UPnP in Windows Example
This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP.
Installing UPnP in Windows Me
Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me.
1
Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove Programs.
134
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Home Networking
2
Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the
Components selection box. Click Details.
Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication
3
In the Communications window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the Components selection box.
Add/Remove Programs: Windows Setup: Communication: Components
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
135
Chapter 8 Home Networking
4
Click OK to go back to the Add/Remove Programs Properties window and click
Next.
5
Restart the computer when prompted.
Installing UPnP in Windows XP
Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP.
1
Click Start and Control Panel.
2
Double-click Network Connections.
3
In the Network Connections window, click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components ….
Network Connections
4
The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays.
Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details.
Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard
136
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Home Networking
5
In the Networking Services window, select the Universal Plug and Play check box.
Networking Services
6
Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and click Next.
8.6 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example
This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP. You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the ZyXEL
Device.
Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the ZyXEL Device. Turn on your computer and the ZyXEL Device.
Auto-discover Your UPnP-enabled Network Device
1
Click Start and Control Panel. Double-click Network Connections. An icon displays under Internet Gateway.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
137
Chapter 8 Home Networking
2
Right-click the icon and select Properties.
Network Connections
3
In the Internet Connection Properties window, click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created.
Internet Connection Properties
138
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Home Networking
4
You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings.
Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings
Internet Connection Properties: Advanced Settings: Add
5
When the UPnP-enabled device is disconnected from your computer, all port mappings will be deleted automatically.
6
Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK.
An icon displays in the system tray.
System Tray Icon
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
139
Chapter 8 Home Networking
7
Double-click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status.
Internet Connection Status
Web Configurator Easy Access
With UPnP, you can access the web-based configurator on the ZyXEL Device without finding out the IP address of the ZyXEL Device first. This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the ZyXEL Device.
Follow the steps below to access the web configurator.
1
Click Start and then Control Panel.
2
Double-click Network Connections.
140
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
3
Select My Network Places under Other Places.
Network Connections
Chapter 8 Home Networking
4
An icon with the description for each UPnP-enabled device displays under Local
Network.
5
Right-click on the icon for your ZyXEL Device and select Invoke. The web configurator login screen displays.
Network Connections: My Network Places
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
141
Chapter 8 Home Networking
6
Right-click on the icon for your ZyXEL Device and select Properties. A properties window displays with basic information about the ZyXEL Device.
Network Connections: My Network Places: Properties: Example
8.7 Technical Reference
This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter.
142
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Home Networking
8.7.1
LANs, WANs and the ZyXEL Device
The actual physical connection determines whether the ZyXEL Device ports are
LAN or WAN ports. There are two separate IP networks, one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next.
Figure 48 LAN and WAN IP Addresses
LAN WAN
8.7.2 DHCP Setup
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131 and RFC 2132) allows individual clients to obtain TCP/IP configuration at start-up from a server. You can configure the ZyXEL Device as a DHCP server or disable it. When configured as a server, the ZyXEL Device provides the TCP/IP configuration for the clients. If you turn DHCP service off, you must have another DHCP server on your LAN, or else the computer must be manually configured.
IP Pool Setup
The ZyXEL Device is pre-configured with a pool of IP addresses for the DHCP clients (DHCP Pool). See the product specifications in the appendices. Do not assign static IP addresses from the DHCP pool to your LAN computers.
8.7.3 DNS Server Addresses
DNS (Domain Name System) maps a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it. The DNS server addresses you enter when you set up DHCP are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask.
There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
143
Chapter 8 Home Networking
• The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses, usually in the form of an information sheet, when you sign up. If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses, enter them in the DNS Server fields in the DHCP Setup screen.
• Some ISPs choose to disseminate the DNS server addresses using the DNS server extensions of IPCP (IP Control Protocol) after the connection is up. If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS servers, chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation. The ZyXEL Device supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature.
Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions. It does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances. If your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers, make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the DHCP Setup screen.
8.7.4 LAN TCP/IP
The ZyXEL Device has built-in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability.
IP Address and Subnet Mask
Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name, so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number.
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0 and you must enable the
Network Address Translation (NAT) feature of the ZyXEL Device. The Internet
Assigned Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise.
Let's say you select 192.168.1.0 as the network number; which covers 254 individual addresses, from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.1.254 (zero and 255 are reserved). In other words, the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network.
Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address that is easy to remember, for instance, 192.168.1.1, for your ZyXEL Device, but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address.
144
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 8 Home Networking
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your
ZyXEL Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise.
Private IP Addresses
Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet, for example, only between your two branch offices, you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the Internet
Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
• 10.0.0.0 — 10.255.255.255
• 172.16.0.0 — 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses.
Note: Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address; always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, “Address Allocation for Private
Internets” and RFC 1466, “Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space”.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
145
Chapter 8 Home Networking
146
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 9
Static Routing
9.1 Overview
The ZyXEL Device usually uses the default gateway to route outbound traffic from computers on the LAN to the Internet. To have the ZyXEL Device send data to devices not reachable through the default gateway, use static routes.
For example, the next figure shows a computer (A) connected to the ZyXEL
Device’s LAN interface. The ZyXEL Device routes most traffic from A to the
Internet through the ZyXEL Device’s default gateway (R1). You create one static route to connect to services offered by your ISP behind router R2. You create another static route to communicate with a separate network behind a router R3 connected to the LAN.
Figure 49 Example of Static Routing Topology
A
R1
LAN
WAN
R3
R2
147
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Static Routing
9.2 The Routing Screen
Use this screen to view and configure the static route rules on the ZyXEL Device.
Click Network Settings > Routing > Static Route to open the following screen.
Figure 50 Network Settings > Routing > Static Route
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 28 Network Settings > Routing > Static Route
LABEL
Add new
Static Route
Entry
DESCRIPTION
Click this to configure a new static route.
#
Status
This is the index number of the entry.
This field displays whether the static route is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this route is active. A gray bulb signifies that this route is not active.
Name This is the name that describes or identifies this route.
Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination.
Routing is always based on network number.
Subnet Mask This parameter specifies the IP network subnet mask of the final destination.
Gateway This is the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the static route on the ZyXEL Device.
Click the Delete icon to remove a static route from the ZyXEL Device. A window displays asking you to confirm that you want to delete the route.
148
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 9 Static Routing
9.2.1 Add/Edit Static Route
Use this screen to add or edit a static route. Click Add new Static Route Entry in the Routing screen or the Edit icon next to the static route you want to edit. The screen shown next appears.
Figure 51 Routing: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 29 Routing: Add/Edit
LABEL
Active
DESCRIPTION
This field allows you to activate/deactivate this static route.
Route Name
Destination IP
Address
Select this to enable the static route. Clear this to disable this static route without having to delete the entry.
Enter a descriptive name for the static route.
This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination.
Routing is always based on network number. If you need to specify a route to a single host, use a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host
ID.
Enter the IP subnet mask here.
IP Subnet
Mask
Gateway IP
Address
Apply
Cancel
Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device's LAN or WAN port. The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
149
Chapter 9 Static Routing
150
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 1 0
Quality of Service (QoS)
10.1 Overview
Quality of Service (QoS) refers to both a network’s ability to deliver data with minimum delay, and the networking methods used to control the use of bandwidth. Without QoS, all traffic data is equally likely to be dropped when the network is congested. This can cause a reduction in network performance and make the network inadequate for time-critical application such as video-ondemand.
Configure QoS on the ZyXEL Device to group and prioritize application traffic and fine-tune network performance. Setting up QoS involves these steps:
1
Configure classifiers to sort traffic into different flows.
2
Assign priority and define actions to be performed for a classified traffic flow.
The ZyXEL Device assigns each packet a priority and then queues the packet accordingly. Packets assigned a high priority are processed more quickly than those with low priority if there is congestion, allowing time-sensitive applications to flow more smoothly. Time-sensitive applications include both those that require a low level of latency (delay) and a low level of jitter (variations in delay) such as
Voice over IP (VoIP) or Internet gaming, and those for which jitter alone is a problem such as Internet radio or streaming video.
This chapter contains information about configuring QoS and editing classifiers.
10.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The General screen lets you enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth (
• The Queue Setup screen lets you configure QoS queue assignment ( Section
• The Class Setup screen lets you add, edit or delete QoS classifiers ( Section
• The Policer Setup screen lets you add, edit or delete QoS policers (
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
151
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
• The Monitor screen lets you view the ZyXEL Device's QoS-related packet statistics (
10.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
QoS versus Cos
QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the same flow are given the same priority. CoS (class of service) is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic together and treating each type as a class. You can use CoS to give different priorities to different packet types.
CoS technologies include IEEE 802.1p layer 2 tagging and DiffServ (Differentiated
Services or DS). IEEE 802.1p tagging makes use of three bits in the packet header, while DiffServ is a new protocol and defines a new DS field, which replaces the eight-bit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header.
Tagging and Marking
In a QoS class, you can configure whether to add or change the DSCP (DiffServ
Code Point) value, IEEE 802.1p priority level and VLAN ID number in a matched packet. When the packet passes through a compatible network, the networking device, such as a backbone switch, can provide specific treatment or service based on the tag or marker.
Traffic Shaping
Bursty traffic may cause network congestion. Traffic shaping regulates packets to be transmitted with a pre-configured data transmission rate using buffers (or queues). Your ZyXEL Device uses the Token Bucket algorithm to allow a certain amount of large bursts while keeping a limit at the average rate.
Traffic Rate Traffic Rate
152
Time
(Before Traffic Shaping)
Time
(After Traffic Shaping)
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
Traffic Policing
Traffic policing is the limiting of the input or output transmission rate of a class of traffic on the basis of user-defined criteria. Traffic policing methods measure traffic flows against user-defined criteria and identify it as either conforming, exceeding or violating the criteria.
Traffic Rate Traffic Rate
Time
(Before Traffic Policing)
Time
(After Traffic Policing)
The ZyXEL Device supports three incoming traffic metering algorithms: Token
Bucket Filter (TBF), Single Rate Two Color Maker (srTCM), and Two Rate Two Color
Marker (trTCM). You can specify actions which are performed on the colored packets. See
Section 10.8 on page 166 for more information on each metering
algorithm.
10.3 The Quality of Service General Screen
Click Network Settings > QoS > General to open the screen as shown next.
Use this screen to enable or disable QoS and set the upstream bandwidth. See
Section 10.1 on page 151 for more information.
Figure 52 Network Settings > QoS > General
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
153
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 30 Network Settings > QoS > General
LABEL
QoS
WAN Managed
Upstream
Bandwidth
DESCRIPTION
Select the Enable check box to turn on QoS to improve your network performance.
Enter the amount of upstream bandwidth for the WAN interfaces that you want to allocate using QoS.
The recommendation is to set this speed to match the interfaces’ actual transmission speed. For example, set the WAN interfaces’ speed to
100000 kbps if your Internet connection has an upstream transmission speed of 100 Mbps.
LAN Managed
Downstream
Bandwidth
Apply
Cancel
You can set this number higher than the interfaces’ actual transmission speed. The ZyXEL Device uses up to 95% of the DSL port’s actual upstream transmission speed even if you set this number higher than the DSL port’s actual transmission speed.
You can also set this number lower than the interfaces’ actual transmission speed. This will cause the ZyXEL Device to not use some of the interfaces’ available bandwidth.
If you leave this field blank, the ZyXEL Device automatically sets this number to be 95% of the WAN interfaces’ actual upstream transmission speed.
Enter the amount of downstream bandwidth for the LAN interfaces
(including WLAN) that you want to allocate using QoS.
The recommendation is to set this speed to match the WAN interfaces’ actual transmission speed. For example, set the LAN managed downstream bandwidth to 100000 kbps if you use a 100 Mbps wired
Ethernet WAN connection.
You can also set this number lower than the WAN interfaces’ actual transmission speed. This will cause the ZyXEL Device to not use some of the interfaces’ available bandwidth.
If you leave this field blank, the ZyXEL Device automatically sets this to the LAN interfaces’ maximum supported connection speed.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
10.4 The Queue Setup Screen
Click Network Settings > QoS > Queue Setup to open the screen as shown next.
154
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
Use this screen to configure QoS queue assignment.
Figure 53 Network Settings > QoS > Queue Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 31 Network Settings > QoS > Queue Setup
LABEL
Add new
Queue
#
Status
Name
Interface
Priority
Weight
Buffer
Management
DESCRIPTION
Click this button to create a new queue entry.
This is the index number of the entry.
This field displays whether the queue is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this queue is active. A gray bulb signifies that this queue is not active.
This shows the descriptive name of this queue.
This shows the name of the ZyXEL Device’s interface through which traffic in this queue passes.
This shows the priority of this queue.
This shows the weight of this queue.
This shows the queue management algorithm used for this queue.
Rate Limit
Modify
Queue management algorithms determine how the ZyXEL Device should handle packets when it receives too many (network congestion).
This shows the maximum transmission rate allowed for traffic on this queue.
Click the Edit icon to edit the queue.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing queue. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
155
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
10.4.1 Adding a QoS Queue
Click Add new Queue or the edit icon in the Queue Setup screen to configure a queue.
Figure 54 Queue Setup: Add
156
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 32 Queue Setup: Add
LABEL
Active
Name
Interface
DESCRIPTION
Select to enable or disable this queue.
Enter the descriptive name of this queue.
Select the interface to which this queue is applied.
Priority
Weight
Buffer
Management
Rate Limit
Apply
Cancel
This field is read-only if you are editing the queue.
Select the priority level (from 1 to 3) of this queue.
The smaller the number, the higher the priority level. Traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower priority queues is dropped if the network is congested.
Select the weight (from 1 to 8) of this queue.
If two queues have the same priority level, the ZyXEL Device divides the bandwidth across the queues according to their weights. Queues with larger weights get more bandwidth than queues with smaller weights.
This field displays Drop Tail (DT). Drop Tail (DT) is a simple queue management algorithm that allows the ZyXEL Device buffer to accept as many packets as it can until it is full. Once the buffer is full, new packets that arrive are dropped until there is space in the buffer again (packets are transmitted out of it).
Specify the maximum transmission rate (in Kbps) allowed for traffic on this queue.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
10.5 The Class Setup Screen
Use this screen to add, edit or delete QoS classifiers. A classifier groups traffic into data flows according to specific criteria such as the source address, destination address, source port number, destination port number or incoming interface. For example, you can configure a classifier to select traffic from the same protocol port (such as Telnet) to form a flow.
You can give different priorities to traffic that the ZyXEL Device forwards out through the WAN interface. Give high priority to voice and video to make them run more smoothly. Similarly, give low priority to many large file downloads so that they do not reduce the quality of other applications.
Click Network Settings > QoS > Class Setup to open the following screen.
Figure 55 Network Settings > QoS > Class Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 33 Network Settings > QoS > Class Setup
LABEL
Add new
Classifier
#
Status
Class Name
Classification
Criteria
DSCP Mark
802.1P Mark
VLAN ID Tag
DESCRIPTION
Click this to create a new classifier.
This is the index number of the entry.
This field displays whether the classifier is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this classifier is active. A gray bulb signifies that this classifier is not active.
This is the name of the classifier.
This shows criteria specified in this classifier, for example the interface from which traffic of this class should come and the source MAC address of traffic that matches this classifier.
This is the DSCP number added to traffic of this classifier.
This is the IEEE 802.1p priority level assigned to traffic of this classifier.
This is the VLAN ID number assigned to traffic of this classifier.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
157
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 33 Network Settings > QoS > Class Setup
LABEL
To Queue
Modify
DESCRIPTION
This is the name of the queue in which traffic of this classifier is put.
Click the Edit icon to edit the classifier.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing classifier. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action.
158
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
10.5.1 Add/Edit QoS Class
Click Add new Classifier in the Class Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a classifier to open the following screen.
Figure 56 Class Setup: Add/Edit
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
159
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 34 Class Setup: Add/Edit
LABEL
Active
Class Name
Classification
Order
DESCRIPTION
Select this to enable this classifier.
Enter a descriptive name of up to 15 printable English keyboard characters, not including spaces.
Select an existing number for where you want to put this classifier to move the classifier to the number you selected after clicking Apply.
From Interface
To Interface
Ether Type
Select Last to put this rule in the back of the classifier list.
If you want to classify the traffic by an ingress interface, select an interface from the From Interface drop-down list box.
If you want to classify the traffic by an egress interface, select an interface from the To Interface drop-down list box.
Select a predefined application to configure a class for the matched traffic.
If you select IP, you also need to configure source or destination MAC address, IP address, DHCP options, DSCP value or the protocol type.
If you select 802.1Q, you can configure an 802.1p priority level.
Source
Address
Subnet
Netmask
Port Range
Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP address.
Enter the source subnet mask.
MAC
MAC Mask
Exclude
If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the source.
Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet.
Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet’s MAC address should match.
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address should match. Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to
00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a
MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria.
Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier.
Destination
Address
Subnet
Netmask
Port Range
Select the check box and enter the source IP address in dotted decimal notation. A blank source IP address means any source IP address.
Enter the source subnet mask.
MAC
If you select TCP or UDP in the IP Protocol field, select the check box and enter the port number(s) of the source.
Select the check box and enter the source MAC address of the packet.
160
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 34 Class Setup: Add/Edit
LABEL
MAC Mask
DESCRIPTION
Type the mask for the specified MAC address to determine which bits a packet’s MAC address should match.
Exclude
Enter “f” for each bit of the specified source MAC address that the traffic’s MAC address should match. Enter “0” for the bit(s) of the matched traffic’s MAC address, which can be of any hexadecimal character(s). For example, if you set the MAC address to
00:13:49:00:00:00 and the mask to ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, a packet with a
MAC address of 00:13:49:12:34:56 matches this criteria.
Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier.
Others
Service This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
IP Protocol
DHCP
This field simplifies classifier configuration by allowing you to select a predefined application. When you select a predefined application, you do not configure the rest of the filter fields.
This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and select the protocol (service type) from TCP,
UDP, ICMP or IGMP. If you select User defined, enter the protocol
(service type) number.
This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and select a DHCP option.
If you select Vendor Class ID (DHCP Option 60), enter the Vendor
Class Identifier (Option 60) of the matched traffic, such as the type of the hardware or firmware.
If you select User Class ID (DHCP Option 77), enter a string that identifies the user’s category or application type in the matched DHCP packets.
Packet Length This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
DSCP
802.1P
Select this option and enter the minimum and maximum packet length (from 46 to 1500) in the fields provided.
This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and specify a DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) number between 0 and 63 in the field provided.
This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type field.
VLAN ID
Select this option and select a priority level (between 0 and 7) from the drop-down list box.
"0" is the lowest priority level and "7" is the highest.
This field is available only when you select 802.1Q in the Ether Type field.
Select this option and specify a VLAN ID number.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
161
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 34 Class Setup: Add/Edit
LABEL
TCP ACK
DESCRIPTION
This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
Exclude
DSCP Mark
802.1P Mark
VLAN ID
To Queue Index
Apply
Cancel
If you select this option, the matched TCP packets must contain the
ACK (Acknowledge) flag.
Select this option to exclude the packets that match the specified criteria from this classifier.
This field is available only when you select IP in the Ether Type field.
If you select Mark, enter a DSCP value with which the ZyXEL Device replaces the DSCP field in the packets.
If you select Unchange, the ZyXEL Device keep the DSCP field in the packets.
Select a priority level with which the ZyXEL Device replaces the IEEE
802.1p priority field in the packets.
If you select Unchange, the ZyXEL Device keep the 802.1p priority field in the packets.
If you select Remark, enter a VLAN ID number with which the ZyXEL
Device replaces the VLAN ID of the frames.
If you select Remove, the ZyXEL Device deletes the VLAN ID of the frames before forwarding them out.
If you select Add, the ZyXEL Device treat all matched traffic untagged and add a second VLAN ID.
If you select Unchange, the ZyXEL Device keep the VLAN ID in the packets.
Select a queue that applies to this class.
You should have configured a queue in the Queue Setup screen already.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
162
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
10.6 The QoS Policer Setup Screen
Use this screen to configure QoS policers that allow you to limit the transmission rate of incoming traffic. Click Network Settings > QoS > Policer Setup. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 57 Network Settings > QoS > Policer Setup
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 35 Network Settings > QoS > Policer Setup
LABEL
Add new Policer
#
Status
Name
Regulated
Classes
Meter Type
DESCRIPTION
Click this to create a new entry.
This is the index number of the entry.
This field displays whether the policer is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this policer is active. A gray bulb signifies that this policer is not active.
This field displays the descriptive name of this policer.
This field displays the name of a QoS classifier
Maximum Rate
Burst Size
Modify
This field displays the type of QoS metering algorithm used in this policer.
This field displays the maximum rate configured for the metering algorithm in the policer.
This field displays the burst size configured for the metering algorithm in the policer.
Click the Edit icon to edit the policer.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing policer. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
163
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
10.6.1 Add/Edit a QoS Policer
Click Add new Officer in the Policer Setup screen or the Edit icon next to a policer to show the following screen.
Figure 58 Policer Setup: Add/Edit
164
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 36 Policer Setup: Add/Edit
LABEL
Active
Name
Meter Type
DESCRIPTION
Select the check box to activate this policer.
Enter the descriptive name of this policer.
This shows the traffic metering algorithm used in this policer.
Maximum
Rate
Burst Size
The Simple Token Bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted. Each token represents one byte. The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes which is also the bucket size.
Specify the guaranteed rate at which packets are admitted to the network.
This is to specify how many bytes of tokens are added to a bucket every second.
Specify the guaranteed amount of bytes that are admitted at the committed rate.
Available
Class
Selected
Class
This is the maximum size of the (first) token bucket in a traffic metering algorithm.
Select a QoS classifier to apply this QoS policer to traffic that matches the
QoS classifier.
Highlight a QoS classifier in the Available Class box and use the > button to move it to the Selected Class box.
To remove a QoS classifier from the Selected Class box, select it and use the < button.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 36 Policer Setup: Add/Edit
LABEL
Apply
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
10.7 The QoS Monitor Screen
To view the ZyXEL Device’s QoS packet statistics, click Network Settings > QoS
> Monitor. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 59 Network Settings > QoS > Monitor
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 37 Network Settings > QoS > Monitor
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Refresh Interval Enter how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen.
Select No Refresh to stop refreshing statistics.
Interface Monitor
#
Name
Pass Rate
This is the index number of the entry.
This shows the name of the interface on the ZyXEL Device.
Drop Rate
This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are transmitted successfully.
This shows how many packets forwarded to this interface are dropped.
Queue Monitor
#
Name
This is the index number of the entry.
This shows the name of the queue.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
165
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
Table 37 Network Settings > QoS > Monitor (continued)
LABEL
Pass Rate
Drop Rate
DESCRIPTION
This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are transmitted successfully.
This shows how many packets assigned to this queue are dropped.
10.8 Technical Reference
The following section contains additional technical information about the ZyXEL
Device features described in this chapter.
IEEE 802.1Q Tag
The IEEE 802.1Q standard defines an explicit VLAN tag in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges. A VLAN tag includes the
12-bit VLAN ID and 3-bit user priority. The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that devices need to process the frame across the network.
IEEE 802.1p specifies the user priority field and defines up to eight separate traffic types. The following table describes the traffic types defined in the IEEE 802.1d standard (which incorporates the 802.1p).
Table 38 IEEE 802.1p Priority Level and Traffic Type
PRIORITY
LEVEL
Level 7
TRAFFIC TYPE
Level 6
Level 5
Level 4
Level 3
Level 2
Level 1
Level 0
Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages.
Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter (jitter is the variations in delay).
Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter.
Typically used for controlled load, latency-sensitive traffic such as SNA
(Systems Network Architecture) transactions.
Typically used for “excellent effort” or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay.
This is for “spare bandwidth”.
This is typically used for non-critical “background” traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users.
Typically used for best-effort traffic.
166
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
DiffServ
QoS is used to prioritize source-to-destination traffic flows. All packets in the flow are given the same priority. You can use CoS (class of service) to give different priorities to different packet types.
DiffServ (Differentiated Services) is a class of service (CoS) model that marks packets so that they receive specific per-hop treatment at DiffServ-compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow.
Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points (DSCPs) indicating the level of service desired. This allows the intermediary DiffServ-compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow. In addition, applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going.
DSCP and Per-Hop Behavior
DiffServ defines a new Differentiated Services (DS) field to replace the Type of
Service (TOS) field in the IP header. The DS field contains a 2-bit unused field and a 6-bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels. The following figure illustrates the DS field.
DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non-DiffServ compliant, ToS-enabled network device will not conflict with the
DSCP mapping.
DSCP (6 bits) Unused (2 bits)
The DSCP value determines the forwarding behavior, the PHB (Per-Hop Behavior), that each packet gets across the DiffServ network. Based on the marking rule, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies.
IP Precedence
Similar to IEEE 802.1p prioritization at layer-2, you can use IP precedence to prioritize packets in a layer-3 network. IP precedence uses three bits of the eightbit ToS (Type of Service) field in the IP header. There are eight classes of services
(ranging from zero to seven) in IP precedence. Zero is the lowest priority level and seven is the highest.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
167
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
Automatic Priority Queue Assignment
If you enable QoS on the ZyXEL Device, the ZyXEL Device can automatically base on the IEEE 802.1p priority level, IP precedence and/or packet length to assign priority to traffic which does not match a class.
The following table shows you the internal layer-2 and layer-3 QoS mapping on the ZyXEL Device. On the ZyXEL Device, traffic assigned to higher priority queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested.
Table 39 Internal Layer2 and Layer3 QoS Mapping
LAYER 2 LAYER 3
PRIORITY
QUEUE
2
3
0
1
4
5
6
7
0
3
1
2
IEEE 802.1P
USER PRIORITY
(ETHERNET
PRIORITY)
4
5
6
7
TOS (IP
PRECEDENCE)
DSCP
0
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
000000
010000
011110
011100
011010
011000
100110
100100
100010
000000
001110
001100
001010
001000
010110
010100
010010
100000
101110
101000
110000
111000
IP PACKET
LENGTH (BYTE)
>1100
250~1100
<250
168
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
Token Bucket
The token bucket algorithm uses tokens in a bucket to control when traffic can be transmitted. The bucket stores tokens, each of which represents one byte. The algorithm allows bursts of up to b bytes which is also the bucket size, so the bucket can hold up to b tokens. Tokens are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate. The following shows how tokens work with packets:
• A packet can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes).
• After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed from the bucket.
• If there are no tokens in the bucket, the ZyXEL Device stops transmitting until enough tokens are generated.
• If not enough tokens are available, the ZyXEL Device treats the packet in either one of the following ways:
In traffic shaping:
• Holds it in the queue until enough tokens are available in the bucket.
In traffic policing:
• Drops it.
• Transmits it but adds a DSCP mark. The ZyXEL Device may drop these marked packets if the network is overloaded.
Configure the bucket size to be equal to or less than the amount of the bandwidth that the interface can support. It does not help if you set it to a bucket size over the interface’s capability. The smaller the bucket size, the lower the data transmission rate and that may cause outgoing packets to be dropped. A larger transmission rate requires a big bucket size. For example, use a bucket size of 10 kbytes to get the transmission rate up to 10 Mbps.
Single Rate Three Color Marker
The Single Rate Three Color Marker (srTCM, defined in RFC 2697) is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to one user-defined rate, the Committed Information Rate (CIR), and two burst sizes: the Committed Burst
Size (CBS) and Excess Burst Size (EBS).
The srTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green.
The srTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets (CBS and
EBS). Tokens are generated and added into the bucket at a constant rate, called
Committed Information Rate (CIR). When the first bucket (CBS) is full, new tokens overflow into the second bucket (EBS).
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
169
Chapter 10 Quality of Service (QoS)
All packets are evaluated against the CBS. If a packet does not exceed the CBS it is marked green. Otherwise it is evaluated against the EBS. If it is below the EBS then it is marked yellow. If it exceeds the EBS then it is marked red.
The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in srTCM:
• A packet arrives. The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes).
• After a packet is transmitted, a number of tokens corresponding to the packet size is removed from the CBS bucket.
• If there are not enough tokens in the CBS bucket, the ZyXEL Device checks the
EBS bucket. The packet is marked yellow if there are sufficient tokens in the
EBS bucket. Otherwise, the packet is marked red. No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped.
Two Rate Three Color Marker
The Two Rate Three Color Marker (trTCM, defined in RFC 2698) is a type of traffic policing that identifies packets by comparing them to two user-defined rates: the
Committed Information Rate (CIR) and the Peak Information Rate (PIR). The CIR specifies the average rate at which packets are admitted to the network. The PIR is greater than or equal to the CIR. CIR and PIR values are based on the guaranteed and maximum bandwidth respectively as negotiated between a service provider and client.
The trTCM evaluates incoming packets and marks them with one of three colors which refer to packet loss priority levels. High packet loss priority level is referred to as red, medium is referred to as yellow and low is referred to as green.
The trTCM is based on the token bucket filter and has two token buckets
(Committed Burst Size (CBS) and Peak Burst Size (PBS)). Tokens are generated and added into the two buckets at the CIR and PIR respectively.
All packets are evaluated against the PIR. If a packet exceeds the PIR it is marked red. Otherwise it is evaluated against the CIR. If it exceeds the CIR then it is marked yellow. Finally, if it is below the CIR then it is marked green.
The following shows how tokens work with incoming packets in trTCM:
• A packet arrives. If the number of tokens in the PBS bucket is less than the size of the packet (in bytes), the packet is marked red and may be dropped regardless of the CBS bucket. No tokens are removed if the packet is dropped.
• If the PBS bucket has enough tokens, the ZyXEL Device checks the CBS bucket.
The packet is marked green and can be transmitted if the number of tokens in the CBS bucket is equal to or greater than the size of the packet (in bytes).
Otherwise, the packet is marked yellow.
170
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 11
Policy Forwarding
11.1 Overview
Traditionally, routing is based on the destination address only and the ZyXEL
Device takes the shortest path to forward a packet. Policy forwarding allows the
ZyXEL Device to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator. Policy-based routing is applied to outgoing packets, prior to the normal routing.
You can use source-based policy forwarding to direct traffic from different users through different connections or distribute traffic among multiple paths for load sharing.
11.2 The Policy Forwarding Screen
The Policy Forwarding screens let you view and configure routing policies on the
ZyXEL Device. Click Network Settings > Routing > Policy Forwarding to open the Policy Forwarding screen.
Figure 60 Network Settings > Routing > Policy Forwarding
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 40 Network Settings > Routing > Policy Forwarding
LABEL
Add new
Policy Forward
Rule
#
Policy Name
DESCRIPTION
Click this to create a new policy forwarding rule.
This is the index number of the entry.
This is the name of the rule.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
171
Chapter 11 Policy Forwarding
Table 40 Network Settings > Routing > Policy Forwarding
LABEL
Source IP
Source
Subnet Mask
Protocol
SourcePort
Source MAC
WAN
Modify
DESCRIPTION
This is the source IP address.
This is the source subnet mask address.
This is the transport layer protocol.
This is the source port number.
This is the source MAC address.
This is the WAN interface through which the traffic is routed.
Click the Edit icon to edit this policy.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing policy.
11.2.1 Add/Edit Policy Forwarding
Click Add new Policy Forward Rule in the Policy Forwarding screen or click the Edit icon next to a policy. Use this screen to configure the required information for a policy route.
Figure 61 Policy Forwarding: Add/Edit
172
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 41 Policy Forwarding: Add/Edit
LABEL
Policy Name
DESCRIPTION
Enter a descriptive name of up to 8 printable English keyboard characters, not including spaces.
Enter the source IP address.
Source IP
Address
Source Subnet
Mask
Protocol
Source Port
Source Mac
Enter the source subnet mask address.
Select the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP).
Enter the source port number.
Enter the source MAC address.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 11 Policy Forwarding
Table 41 Policy Forwarding: Add/Edit
LABEL
WAN
Apply
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
Select a WAN interface through which the traffic is sent. You must have the WAN interface(s) already configured in the Broadband screens.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
173
Chapter 11 Policy Forwarding
174
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 1 2
Network Address Translation
(NAT)
12.1 Overview
This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the ZyXEL Device. NAT (Network
Address Translation - NAT, RFC 1631) is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet, for example, the source address of an outgoing packet, used within one network to a different IP address known within another network.
12.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the Port Forwarding screen to configure forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network (
• Use the Applications screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network (
• Use the Port Triggering screen to add and configure the ZyXEL Device’s trigger port settings (
• Use the DMZ screen to configure a default server ( Section 12.5 on page 185 ).
• Use the ALG screen to enable and disable the SIP (VoIP) ALG in the ZyXEL
Device (
• Use the Sessions screen to limit the number of concurrent NAT sessions all clients can use (
12.1.2 What You Need To Know
Inside/Outside
Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the ZyXEL Device, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts.
175
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 12 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Global/Local
Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side.
NAT
In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber (the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back,
NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host.
Port Forwarding
A port forwarding set is a list of inside (behind NAT on the LAN) servers, for example, web or FTP, that you can make visible to the outside world even though
NAT makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world.
Finding Out More
See Section 12.8 on page 187 for advanced technical information on NAT.
12.2 The Port Forwarding Screen
Use the Port Forwarding screen to forward incoming service requests to the server(s) on your local network.
You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded, and the local IP address of the desired server. The port number identifies a service; for example, web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21. In some cases, such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service (for example both FTP and web service), it might be better to specify a range of port numbers. You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports.
The most often used port numbers and services are shown in
381 . Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers.
176
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 12 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Note: Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes (such as a Web or FTP server) from your location. Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location. If you are unsure, refer to your ISP.
Configuring Servers Behind Port Forwarding (Example)
Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet.
Figure 62 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example
A=192.168.1.33
LAN
B=192.168.1.34
WAN
192.168.1.1
IP Address assigned by ISP
C=192.168.1.3
D=192.168.1.36
Click Network Settings > NAT > Port Forwarding to open the following screen.
See Appendix E on page 381 for port numbers commonly used for particular
services.
Figure 63 Network Settings > NAT > Port Forwarding
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
177
Chapter 12 Network Address Translation (NAT)
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 42 Network Settings > NAT > Port Forwarding
LABEL
Add new rule
DESCRIPTION
Click this to add a new rule.
#
Status
This is the index number of the entry.
This field displays whether the NAT rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active.
Service Name This shows the service’s name.
WAN Interface This shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
This is the first external port number that identifies a service.
External Start
Port
External End
Port
This is the last external port number that identifies a service.
This is the first internal port number that identifies a service.
Internal Start
Port
Internal End
Port
Server IP
Address
Modify
This is the last internal port number that identifies a service.
This is the server’s IP address.
Click the Edit icon to edit this rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule.
12.2.1 Add/Edit Port Forwarding
Click Add new rule in the Port Forwarding screen or click the Edit icon next to an existing rule to open the following screen.
Figure 64 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit
178
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 12 Network Address Translation (NAT)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 43 Port Forwarding: Add/Edit
LABEL
Active
DESCRIPTION
Clear the check box to disable the rule. Select the check box to enable it.
This field is read-only in the Port Forwarding Configuration screen.
Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-
2 and so on).
This field is read-only in the Port Forwarding Edit screen.
WAN Interface Select the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
External Start
Port
You must have already configured a WAN connection with NAT enabled.
Enter the original destination port for the packets.
To forward only one port, enter the port number again in the External
End Port field.
External End
Port
Internal Start
Port
To forward a series of ports, enter the start port number here and the end port number in the External End Port field.
Enter the last port of the original destination port range.
To forward only one port, enter the port number in the External Start
Port field above and then enter it again in this field.
To forward a series of ports, enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the External Start Port field above.
This shows the port number to which you want the ZyXEL Device to translate the incoming port. For a range of ports, enter the first number of the range to which you want the incoming ports translated.
This shows the last port of the translated port range.
Internal End
Port
Server IP
Address
Protocol Type
Enter the inside IP address of the virtual server here.
Apply
Cancel
Select the protocol supported by this virtual server. Choices are TCP,
UDP, or TCP/UDP.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
12.3 The Applications Screen
This screen provides a summary of all NAT applications and their configuration. In addition, this screen allows you to create new applications and/or remove existing ones.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
179
Chapter 12 Network Address Translation (NAT)
To access this screen, click Network Settings > NAT > Applications. The following screen appears.
Figure 65 Network Settings > NAT > Applications
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 44 Network Settings > NAT > Applications
LABEL
Add new application
DESCRIPTION
Click this to add a new NAT application rule.
Application
Forwarded
This field shows the type of application that the service forwards.
WAN Interface This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
This field displays the destination IP address for the service.
Server IP
Address
Modify Click the Delete icon to delete the rule.
12.3.1 Add New Application
This screen lets you create new NAT application rules. Click Add new application in the Applications screen to open the following screen.
Figure 66 Applications: Add
180
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 12 Network Address Translation (NAT)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 45 Applications: Add
LABEL DESCRIPTION
WAN Interface Select the WAN interface that you want to apply this NAT rule to.
Enter the inside IP address of the application here.
Server IP
Address
Application
Category
Application
Forwarded
Select the category of the application from the drop-down list box.
View Rule
Apply
Cancel
Select a service from the drop-down list box and the ZyXEL Device automatically configures the protocol, start, end, and map port number that define the service.
Click this to display the configuration of the service that you have chosen in Application Fowarded.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
12.4 The Port Triggering Screen
Some services use a dedicated range of ports on the client side and a dedicated range of ports on the server side. With regular port forwarding you set a forwarding port in NAT to forward a service (coming in from the server on the
WAN) to the IP address of a computer on the client side (LAN). The problem is that port forwarding only forwards a service to a single LAN IP address. In order to use the same service on a different LAN computer, you have to manually replace the LAN computer's IP address in the forwarding port with another LAN computer's IP address.
Trigger port forwarding solves this problem by allowing computers on the LAN to dynamically take turns using the service. The ZyXEL Device records the IP address of a LAN computer that sends traffic to the WAN to request a service with a specific port number and protocol (a "trigger" port). When the ZyXEL Device's
WAN port receives a response with a specific port number and protocol ("open" port), the ZyXEL Device forwards the traffic to the LAN IP address of the computer that sent the request. After that computer’s connection for that service closes, another computer on the LAN can use the service in the same manner. This way you do not need to configure a new IP address each time you want a different LAN computer to use the application.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
181
Chapter 12 Network Address Translation (NAT)
For example:
Figure 67 Trigger Port Forwarding Process: Example
1
Jane requests a file from the Real Audio server (port 7070).
2
Port 7070 is a “trigger” port and causes the ZyXEL Device to record Jane’s computer IP address. The ZyXEL Device associates Jane's computer IP address with the "open" port range of 6970-7170.
3
The Real Audio server responds using a port number ranging between 6970-7170.
4
The ZyXEL Device forwards the traffic to Jane’s computer IP address.
5
Only Jane can connect to the Real Audio server until the connection is closed or times out. The ZyXEL Device times out in three minutes with UDP (User Datagram
Protocol) or two hours with TCP/IP (Transfer Control Protocol/Internet Protocol).
Click Network Settings > NAT > Port Triggering to open the following screen.
Use this screen to view your ZyXEL Device’s trigger port settings.
Figure 68 Network Settings > NAT > Port Triggering
182
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 46 Network Settings > NAT > Port Triggering
LABEL
Add new rule
DESCRIPTION
Click this to create a new rule.
#
Status
This is the index number of the entry.
This field displays whether the port triggering rule is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this rule is active. A gray bulb signifies that this rule is not active.
Service Name This field displays the name of the service used by this rule.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 12 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Table 46 Network Settings > NAT > Port Triggering (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
WAN Interface This field shows the WAN interface through which the service is forwarded.
Trigger Port
Start
End
The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the ZyXEL Device to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN.
This is the first port number that identifies a service.
This is the last port number that identifies a service.
Trigger Proto.
This is the trigger transport layer protocol.
Open The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service. The ZyXEL Device forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the
LAN that requested the service.
Start
End
Open Proto.
Modify
This is the first port number that identifies a service.
This is the last port number that identifies a service.
This is the open transport layer protocol.
Click the Edit icon to edit this rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule.
12.4.1 Add/Edit Port Triggering Rule
This screen lets you create new port triggering rules. Click Add new rule in the
Port Triggering screen or click a rule’s Edit icon to open the following screen.
Figure 69 Port Triggering: Add/Edit
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
183
Chapter 12 Network Address Translation (NAT)
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 47 Port Triggering: Configuration Add/Edit
LABEL
Active
DESCRIPTION
Select the check box to enable this rule.
This field is read-only in the Port Triggering Configuration screen.
Service Name Enter a name to identify this rule using keyboard characters (A-Z, a-z, 1-
2 and so on).
This field is read-only in the Port Triggering Edit screen.
WAN Interface Select a WAN interface for which you want to configure port triggering rules.
Trigger Start
Port
The trigger port is a port (or a range of ports) that causes (or triggers) the ZyXEL Device to record the IP address of the LAN computer that sent the traffic to a server on the WAN.
Trigger End
Port
Trigger
Protocol
Open Start
Port
Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.
Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.
Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP.
The open port is a port (or a range of ports) that a server on the WAN uses when it sends out a particular service. The ZyXEL Device forwards the traffic with this port (or range of ports) to the client computer on the
LAN that requested the service.
Type a port number or the starting port number in a range of port numbers.
Open End Port Type a port number or the ending port number in a range of port numbers.
Open Protocol Select the transport layer protocol from TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP.
Apply Click Apply to save your changes.
Cancel Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
184
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 12 Network Address Translation (NAT)
12.5 The DMZ Screen
In addition to the servers for specified services, NAT supports a default server IP address. A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in the
NAT Port Forwarding Setup screen.
Figure 70 Network Settings > NAT > DMZ
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 48 Network Settings > NAT > DMZ
LABEL
Default Server
Address
DESCRIPTION
Enter the IP address of the default server which receives packets from ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen.
Apply
Cancel
Note: If you do not assign a Default Server Address, the ZyXEL
Device discards all packets received for ports that are not specified in the NAT Port Forwarding screen.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
185
Chapter 12 Network Address Translation (NAT)
12.6 The ALG Screen
Some NAT routers may include a SIP Application Layer Gateway (ALG). A SIP ALG allows SIP calls to pass through NAT by examining and translating IP addresses embedded in the data stream. When the ZyXEL Device registers with the SIP register server, the SIP ALG translates the ZyXEL Device’s private IP address inside the SIP data stream to a public IP address. You do not need to use STUN or an outbound proxy if your ZyXEL Device is behind a SIP ALG.
Use this screen to enable and disable the SIP (VoIP) ALG in the ZyXEL Device. To access this screen, click Network Settings > NAT > ALG.
Figure 71 Network Settings > NAT > ALG
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 49 Network Settings > NAT > ALG
LABEL
ALG
SIP ALG
Apply
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
Enable this to make sure applications such as FTP and file transfer in IM applications work correctly with port-forwarding and address-mapping rules.
Enable this to make sure SIP (VoIP) works correctly with portforwarding and address-mapping rules.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
12.7 The Sessions Screen
Use the Sessions screen to limit the number of concurrent NAT sessions all clients can use.
186
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 12 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Click Network Settings > NAT > Sessions to display the following screen.
Figure 72 Network Settings > NAT > Sessions
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 50 Network Settings > NAT > Sessions
LABEL
MAX NAT
Session
DESCRIPTION
Use this field to set a common limit to the number of concurrent NAT sessions all client computers can have.
Apply
Cancel
If only a few clients use peer to peer applications, you can raise this number to improve their performance. With heavy peer to peer application use, lower this number to ensure no single client uses too many of the available NAT sessions.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
12.8 Technical Reference
This part contains more information regarding NAT.
12.8.1 NAT Definitions
Inside/outside denotes where a host is located relative to the ZyXEL Device, for example, the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts, while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts.
Global/local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router, for example, the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network, while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
187
Chapter 12 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Note that inside/outside refers to the location of a host, while global/local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet. Thus, an inside local address (ILA) is the
IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network, while an inside global address (IGA) is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side. The following table summarizes this information.
Table 51 NAT Definitions
ITEM
Inside
Outside
Local
Global
DESCRIPTION
This refers to the host on the LAN.
This refers to the host on the WAN.
This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the LAN.
This refers to the packet address (source or destination) as the packet travels on the WAN.
NAT never changes the IP address (either local or global) of an outside host.
12.8.2 What NAT Does
In the simplest form, NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber (the inside local address) to another (the inside global address) before forwarding the packet to the WAN side. When the response comes back,
NAT translates the destination address (the inside global address) back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host. Note that the
IP address (either local or global) of an outside host is never changed.
The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP. In addition, you can designate servers, for example, a web server and a telnet server, on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world. If you do not define any servers (for Many-to-One and Many-to-
Many Overload mapping), NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection.
With no servers defined, your ZyXEL Device filters out all incoming inquiries, thus preventing intruders from probing your network. For more information on IP address translation, refer to RFC 1631, The IP Network Address Translator (NAT).
188
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 12 Network Address Translation (NAT)
12.8.3 How NAT Works
Each packet has two addresses – a source address and a destination address. For outgoing packets, the ILA (Inside Local Address) is the source address on the LAN, and the IGA (Inside Global Address) is the source address on the WAN. For incoming packets, the ILA is the destination address on the LAN, and the IGA is the destination address on the WAN. NAT maps private (local) IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks. It replaces the original IP source address (and TCP or UDP source port numbers for
Many-to-One and Many-to-Many Overload NAT mapping) in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet. The ZyXEL Device keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored. The following figure illustrates this.
Figure 73 How NAT Works
LAN
192.168.1.13
192.168.1.12
SA
192.168.1.10
NAT Table
Inside Local
IP Address
192.168.1.10
192.168.1.11
192.168.1.12
192.168.1.13
Inside Global
IP Address
IGA 1
IGA 2
IGA 3
IGA 4
SA
IGA1
WAN
192.168.1.11
192.168.1.10
Inside Local
Address (ILA)
Inside Global
Address (IGA)
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
189
Chapter 12 Network Address Translation (NAT)
12.8.4 NAT Application
The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application, where three inside LANs
(logical LANs using IP alias) behind the ZyXEL Device can communicate with three distinct WAN networks.
Figure 74 NAT Application With IP Alias
190
Port Forwarding: Services and Port Numbers
The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table. Please refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers. Please also refer to the
Supporting CD for more examples and details on port forwarding and NAT.
Table 52 Services and Port Numbers
SERVICES
ECHO
FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
DNS (Domain Name System)
Finger
HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW, Web)
POP3 (Post Office Protocol)
NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol)
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
PORT NUMBER
7
80
110
119
161
21
25
53
79
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 12 Network Address Translation (NAT)
Table 52 Services and Port Numbers
SERVICES
SNMP trap
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol)
PORT NUMBER
162
1723
Port Forwarding Example
Let's say you want to assign ports 21-25 to one FTP, Telnet and SMTP server (A in the example), port 80 to another (B in the example) and assign a default server IP address of 192.168.1.35 to a third (C in the example). You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address. The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet.
Figure 75 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example
A=192.168.1.33
192.168.1.1
B=192.168.1.34
IP address assigned by ISP
C=192.168.1.35
D=192.168.1.36
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
191
Chapter 12 Network Address Translation (NAT)
192
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 1 3
Dynamic DNS Setup
13.1 Overview
DNS
DNS (Domain Name System) is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding
IP address and vice versa. The DNS server is extremely important because without it, you must know the IP address of a machine before you can access it.
In addition to the system DNS server(s), each WAN interface (service) is set to have its own static or dynamic DNS server list. You can configure a DNS static route to forward DNS queries for certain domain names through a specific WAN interface to its DNS server(s). The ZyXEL Device uses a system DNS server (in the order you specify in the Broadband screen) to resolve domain names that do not match any DNS routing entry. After the ZyXEL Device receives a DNS reply from a
DNS server, it creates a new entry for the resolved IP address in the routing table.
In the following example, the DNS server 168.92.5.1 obtained from the WAN interface eth10.0 is set to be the system DNS server. The DNS server 10.10.23.7 is obtained from the WAN interface VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1. You configure a DNS route for *example.com to have the ZyXEL Device forward DNS requests for the domain name mail.example.com through the WAN interface VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1 to the DNS server 10.10.23.7.
193
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Dynamic DNS Setup
Figure 76 Example of DNS Routing Topology
LAN WAN
eth10.0
DNS:168.92.5.1
(Default) sip.service.com
VDSL_PPoE/ppp0.1
DNS:10.10.23.7
mail.example.com
Dynamic DNS
Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you (in NetMeeting, CU-
SeeMe, etc.). You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name (for instance myhost.dhs.org, where myhost is a name of your choice) that will never change instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect. Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don't know your IP address.
First of all, you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www.dyndns.org. This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name. The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key.
13.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the DNS Entry screen to view, configure, or remove DNS routes (
• Use the Dynamic DNS screen to enable DDNS and configure the DDNS settings on the ZyXEL Device (
).
13.1.2 What You Need To Know
DYNDNS Wildcard
Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes *.yourhost.dyndns.org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost.dyndns.org. This feature is useful if
194
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Dynamic DNS Setup you want to be able to use, for example, www.yourhost.dyndns.org and still reach your hostname.
If you have a private WAN IP address, then you cannot use Dynamic DNS.
13.2 The DNS Entry Screen
Use this screen to view and configure DNS routes on the ZyXEL Device. Click
Advanced > DNS Setting to open the DNS Entry screen.
Figure 77 Advanced > DNS Setting > DNS Setting
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 53 Advanced > DNS Setting > DNS Setting
LABEL
Add new DNS entry
#
Hostname
IP Address
Source
Modify
DESCRIPTION
Click this to create a new DNS entry.
This is the index number of the entry.
This indicates the host name or domain name.
This indicates the IP address assigned to this computer.
This indicates the source of the IP address.
Click the Edit icon to edit the rule.
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
195
Chapter 13 Dynamic DNS Setup
13.2.1 Add/Edit DNS Entry
You can manually add or edit the ZyXEL Device’s DNS name and IP address entry.
Click Add new DNS entry in the DNS Entry screen or the Edit icon next to the entry you want to edit. The screen shown next appears.
Figure 78 DNS Entry: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 54 DNS Entry: Add/Edit
LABEL
Host Name
IP Address
Apply
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
Enter the host name of the DNS entry.
Enter the IP address of the DNS entry.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
13.3 The Dynamic DNS Screen
Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device’s DDNS. Click Advanced > DNS
Setting > Dynamic DNS. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 79 Advanced > DNS Setting > Dynamic DNS
196
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 13 Dynamic DNS Setup
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 55 Advanced > DNS Setting > Dynamic DNS
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Dynamic DNS Select this check box to use dynamic DNS.
Select your Dynamic DNS service provider from the drop-down list box.
Service
Provider
Hostname Type the domain name assigned to your ZyXEL Device by your Dynamic
DNS provider.
User Name
Password
Key
Apply
Cancel
You can specify up to two host names in the field separated by a comma
(",").
Type your user name.
Type the password assigned to you.
If you select TZO in the Service Provider field, enter the user name you used to register for this service.
If you select TZO in the Service Provider field, enter the password you used to register for this service.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
197
Chapter 13 Dynamic DNS Setup
198
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 1 4
IGMP
14.1 Overview
Traditionally, IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways - Unicast (1 sender to 1 recipient) or Broadcast (1 sender to everybody on the network).
Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of hosts on the network.
IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) is a network-layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group - it is not used to carry user data. See
RFC 1112, RFC 2236, and RFC 3376 for information on IGMP versions 1, 2, and 3 respectively.
14.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the IGMP General screen to configure general IGMP proxy and IGMP
packet processing settings ( Section 14.2 on page 202 ).
• Use the IGMP Filter screens to control IGMP access ( Section 14.3 on page
• Use the IGMP ACL screens to block or allow access to specific multicast media channels (
14.1.2 What You Need to Know
IP Multicast Addresses
In IPv4, a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts (multicast group) in a different sub-network. A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group, not individual receiving devices. IP addresses in the Class D range (224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255) are used for IP multicasting.
Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes (see the
IANA web site for more information).
IGMP Snooping
A layer-2 switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query, Report and Leave (IGMP version 2) packets transferred between IP multicast routers/switches and IP
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
199
Chapter 14 IGMP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership. It checks IGMP packets passing through it, picks out the group registration information, and configures multicasting accordingly. IGMP snooping allows the ZyXEL Device to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them.
The ZyXEL Device forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups (that it has learned from IGMP snooping or that you have manually configured) to ports that are members of that group. The ZyXEL Device discards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it does not know. IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic, allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your device.
IGMP Proxy
To allow better network performance, you can use IGMP proxy instead of a multicast routing protocol in a simple tree network topology.
Note: Your ZyXEL Device is an IGMP proxy.
In IGMP proxy, an upstream interface is the port that is closer to the source (or the root of the multicast tree) and is able to receive multicast traffic. There should only be one upstream interface (also known as the query port) for one query VLAN on the ZyXEL Device. A downstream interface is a port that connects to a host
(such as a computer).
200
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 14 IGMP
The following figure shows a network example where A is the multicast source while computers 1, 2 and 3 are the receivers. In the figure A is connected to the upstream interface and 1, 2 and 3 are connected to the downstream interface.
Figure 80 IGMP Proxy Network Example
Multicast
Server
Proxy
Hosts
The ZyXEL Device will not respond to IGMP join and leave messages on the upstream interface. The ZyXEL Device only responds to IGMP query messages on the upstream interface. The ZyXEL Device sends IGMP query messages to the hosts that are members of the query VLAN.
The ZyXEL Device only sends an IGMP leave message via the upstream interface when the last host leaves a multicast group.
Router Alert Option
The router alert option provides a way to let routers intercept packets not addressed to them directly, without incurring any significant performance penalty.
The router alert option in the IP header of an IGMP control packet tells the router to examine the packet more closely for routing information. Regular data packets do not receive the extra checking and are forwarded with little or no performance penalty. IGMP v2 and IGMP v3 both require the router alert option while IGMP v1 does not use it at all. See RFC 2113 for more information.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
201
Chapter 14 IGMP
14.2 The IGMP General Screen
Use the IGMP General screen to configure general IGMP proxy and IGMP packet processing settings.
Click Network Settings > IGMP Setting > General to open the following screen.
Figure 81 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > General
202
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 56 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > General
LABEL
IGMP Proxy
Query Interval
Query Response
Interval
Robustness
Value
IGMP Packet
Process
Ignore IGMP packets not from
LAN subnet
DESCRIPTION
Enable this to have the ZyXEL Device reduce multicast traffic by issuing IGMP host messages to a multicast router or server on behalf of the multicast hosts connected to the IGMP proxy device.
Specify how many seconds since the last query the ZyXEL Device waits before it queries all group membership.
directly connected networks to gather multicast
Specify how many seconds the host allots for gathering membership information from directly connected networks before it sends a report.
This is the number of times the host sends a report to the ZyXEL
Device when the ZyXEL Device queries for the host’s status.
Select one or more of these fields to increase the IGMP network’s security or control which types of IGMP packets the ZyXEL Device forwards.
Select this to discard IGMP packets from IP addresses other than the
LAN subnet.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 14 IGMP
Table 56 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > General (continued)
LABEL
Ignore IGMP report without router alert option
Ignore IGMP leave without router alert option
Ignore IGMP query without router alert option
Ignore IGMP query which destination IP is not 224.0.0.1
Apply
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
Select this to discard IGMP report packets that do not include a router alert option.
Select this to discard IGMP leave packets that do not include a router alert option.
Select this to discard IGMP query packets that do not include a router alert option.
Select this to discard IGMP query packets with a destination IP address other than 224.0.0.1, the all-hosts multicast address.
Click this button to save your settings back to the ZyXEL Device.
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
203
Chapter 14 IGMP
14.3 IGMP Filter Configuration
Use this screen to control IGMP access. Click Network Settings > IGMP Setting
> IGMP Filter to open the following screen.
Figure 82 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter
204
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 57 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter
LABEL
Allow IGMP packets from
Ethernet interface
Allow IGMP packets from
WiFi interface
DESCRIPTION
Select this to accept IGMP packets received on any of the LAN
Ethernet ports. Clear this to discard IGMP packets received on any of the LAN Ethernet ports.
Select this to accept IGMP packets received through the wireless LAN interface. Clear this to discard IGMP packets received through the wireless LAN interface.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 14 IGMP
Table 57 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter (continued)
LABEL
Allow IGMP packets from
Ethernet LAN port1 ~ 4
DESCRIPTION
Select specific LAN Ethernet ports upon which to accept IGMP packets.
Clear individual LAN Ethernet port options to discard IGMP packets received on those ports.
LAN Host
LAN Host IP
Type
IGMP Enabled
This table lists the LAN computers the ZyXEL Device has detected.
This is the IP address of a computer on the ZyXEL Device’s LAN.
This shows whether or not the LAN device is a Set Top Box (STB).
This shows whether or not the LAN device is allowed to access IGMP services through the ZyXEL Device.
Max Allowed
Channel
This is how many IGMP channels the LAN device is allowed to subscribe to.
Modify Click the Edit icon to change the entry.
Multicast Service Use this section to limit access to IGMP multicast service domains.
Add a new service
Click this to add a new IGMP multicast service domain.
Service Name This is the name of an IGMP multicast service domain.
Multicast Group This is the multicast address and subnet that the service domain uses.
STB Max
Channels
This is to how many of the service domain’s IGMP channels a LAN STB device is allowed to subscribe.
Non-STB Max
Channels
Modify
This is to how many of the service domain’s IGMP channels LAN devices other than STBs are allowed to subscribe.
Click the Edit icon to change the entry.
Click the Delete icon to delete the entry.
Click this to limit a LAN host’s IGMP access.
Add a new host limitation
Service Name
LAN IP
IGMP Enabled
Max Allowed
Channel
Modify
Apply
Cancel
This is the name of an IGMP multicast service domain.
This is the IP address of a computer on the ZyXEL Device’s LAN.
This shows whether or not the LAN device using the specified IP address is allowed to use the IGMP multicast service domain.
This shows to how many of the IGMP multicast service domain’s channels the LAN device using the specified IP address can subscribe.
Click the Edit icon to change the entry.
Click the Delete icon to delete the entry.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
205
Chapter 14 IGMP
14.3.1 IGMP Host Limitation Edit
Use this screen to control a LAN host’s access to IGMP services through the ZyXEL
Device. Click Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter and then a LAN host’s Edit icon to open the following screen.
Figure 83
Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > LAN Host Edit
206
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 58 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > LAN Host Edit
LABEL
LAN Host
IGMP Enabled
Max Allowed
Channels
Apply
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
This is the IP address of one of the ZyXEL Device’s LAN hosts.
Select whether or not the LAN device using the specified IP address is allowed to access IGMP services through the ZyXEL Device.
Specify to how many IGMP channels the LAN device is allowed to subscribe.
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 14 IGMP
14.3.2 IGMP Service Add
Use this screen to add or edit an IGMP multicast service domain. Click Network
Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > Add a new rule to open the following screen.
Figure 84 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > Add a new service
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 59 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > Add a new service
LABEL
Service Name
Maximum active channels for STB
Maximum active channels for
Non-STB
Group List
DESCRIPTION
Specify a name to identify the IGMP service domain. You can enter up to 30 characters. You can use letters, numbers, hyphens (-) and underscores (_). Spaces are not allowed.
Specify to how many of the service domain’s IGMP channels a LAN STB device is allowed to subscribe.
Specify to how many of the service domain’s IGMP channels LAN devices other than STBs are is allowed to subscribe.
Add a group
Group
Modify
Apply
Cancel
Use this section to specify the multicast groups and subnet masks for this IGMP service domain.
Click this to add a multicast group and subnet mask to this IGMP service domain.
This column lists the multicast groups and subnet masks for this IGMP service domain.
Click the Delete icon to delete the entry.
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
207
Chapter 14 IGMP
14.3.3 IGMP Host Limitation Add
Use this screen to control a LAN host’s access to an IGMP multicast service domain. Click Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > Add a new
host limitation to open the following screen.
Figure 85
Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > Add a new host limitation
208
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 60 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP Filter > Add a new host limitation
LABEL
Service
LAN Host
IGMP Enabled
Max Allowed
Channels
IGMP Enabled
Max Allowed
Channels
Apply
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
Specify the name of the IGMP multicast service domain to which you want to block or allow access.
Select the IP address of one of the ZyXEL Device’s LAN hosts.
Select whether or not the LAN device using the specified IP address is allowed to use the IGMP multicast service domain.
This shows to how many of the IGMP multicast service domain’s channels the LAN device using the specified IP address can subscribe.
Select whether or not the LAN device is allowed to access IGMP services through the ZyXEL Device.
Specify to how many IGMP channels the LAN device is allowed to subscribe.
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 14 IGMP
14.4 IGMP ACL Configuration
Use the IGMP Access Control List (ACL) to block or allow access to specific multicast media channels. Click Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP
ACL to open the following screen.
Figure 86 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP ACL
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 61 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP ACL
LABEL
IGMP ACL List
DESCRIPTION
Select Black List to block access to specific multicast channels and allow access to other multicast channels.
Add a new rule
White List
Multicast
Address
Multicast
Address Mask
Black List
Multicast
Address
Multicast
Address Mask
Modify
Select White List to allow access to only specific multicast channels and block access to other multicast channels.
Select Disabled to have the ZyXEL Device not restrict which multicast channels the multimedia devices on the LAN can access.
Click this to create a new IGMP ACL rule.
These rules are for allowing access to specified multicast IP addresses.
This is the multicast IP address of a multicast media channel to which you want to allow access.
This is the subnet mask of the multicast IP address.
These rules are for blocking access to specific multicast IP addresses.
This is the multicast IP address of a multicast media channel to which you want to block access.
This is the subnet mask of the multicast IP address.
Click the Edit icon to change the entry.
Click the Delete icon to delete the entry.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
209
Chapter 14 IGMP
Table 61 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP ACL (continued)
LABEL
Apply
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
14.4.1 IGMP ACL Add
Use this screen to configure the multicast IP address of a multicast media channel to which you want to block or allow access. Click Network Settings > IGMP
Setting > IGMP ACL > Add a new rule to open the following screen.
Figure 87 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP ACL > Add a new rule
210
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 62 Network Settings > IGMP Setting > IGMP ACL > Add a new rule
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Multicast IP
Address
Enter the multicast IP address of a multicast media channel to which you want to block or allow access.
Multicast IP Mask Enter the subnet mask of the multicast IP address.
Type Select Black List to have this entry block access to the specified multicast IP address.
Apply
Cancel
Select White List to have this entry allow access to the specified multicast IP address.
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 1 5
Interface Group
15.1 Overview
By default, all LAN and WAN interfaces on the ZyXEL Device are in the same group and can communicate with each other. Create interface groups to have the ZyXEL
Device assign the IP addresses in different domains to different groups. Each group acts as an independent network on the ZyXEL Device. This lets devices connected to an interface group’s LAN interfaces communicate through the interface group’s WAN or LAN interfaces but not other WAN or LAN interfaces.
15.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
The Interface Group screens let you create multiple networks on the ZyXEL
Device (
15.2 The Interface Group Screen
You can manually add a LAN interface to a new group. Alternatively, you can have the ZyXEL Device automatically add the incoming traffic and the LAN interface on which traffic is received to an interface group when its DHCP Vendor ID option information matches one listed for the interface group.
Use the LAN screen to configure the private IP addresses the DHCP server on the
ZyXEL Device assigns to the clients in the default and/or user-defined groups. If you set the ZyXEL Device to assign IP addresses based on the client’s DHCP
Vendor ID option information, you must enable DHCP server and configure LAN
211
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Interface Group
In the following example, the client that sends packets with the DHCP Vendor ID option set to MSFT 5.0 (meaning it is a Windows 2000 DHCP client) is assigned the
IP address 192.168.2.2 and uses the WAN VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1 interface.
Figure 88 Interface Grouping Application
Default: ETH 2~4
192.168.1.x/24 eth10.0
Internet
VDSL_PoE/ppp0.1
192.168.2.x/24
DHCP Vendor ID option: MSFT 5.0
Click Network Settings > Interface Group to open the following screen.
Figure 89 Network Settings > Interface Group
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 63 Network Settings > Interface Group
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Add New
Interface Group
Group Name
WAN Interface
Click this button to create a new interface group.
This shows the descriptive name of the group.
This shows the WAN interfaces in the group.
LAN Interfaces This shows the LAN interfaces in the group.
DHCP Vendor IDs The ZyXEL Device automatically adds LAN hosts sending traffic with any of the Vendor Class Identifiers listed here to the interface group.
Modify
Add
This field is blank if you do not have the ZyXEL Device automatically add clients to the interface group based on their Vendor Class
Identifiers.
Click the Delete icon to remove the group.
Click this button to create a new group.
212
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 15 Interface Group
15.2.1 Interface Group Configuration
Click the Add New Interface Group button in the Interface Group screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to create a new interface group.
Note: An interface can belong to only one group at a time.
Figure 90 Interface Group Configuration
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 64 Interface Group Configuration
LABEL
Group Name
DESCRIPTION
Enter a name to identify this group. You can enter up to 30 characters.
You can use letters, numbers, hyphens (-) and underscores (_).
Spaces are not allowed.
Select the WAN interface this group uses.
WAN Interface used in the grouping
Grouped LAN
Interfaces
Available LAN
Interfaces
Select No Interface/None to not add a WAN interface to this group.
Select one or more LAN interfaces (Ethernet LAN or wireless LAN) in the Available LAN Interfaces list and use the left arrow to move them to the Grouped LAN Interfaces list to add the interfaces to this group.
To remove a LAN or wireless LAN interface from the Grouped LAN
Interfaces, use the right-facing arrow.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
213
Chapter 15 Interface Group
Table 64 Interface Group Configuration (continued)
LABEL
Automatically
Add Clients With the following
DHCP Vendor IDs
Apply
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
Enter the Vendor Class Identifiers (DHCP Option 60) to identify LAN hosts to add to the interface group by criteria such as the type of the hardware or firmware.
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
214
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 1 6
Firewall
16.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to enable and configure the ZyXEL Device firewall.
Use the firewall to protect your ZyXEL Device and network from attacks by hackers on the Internet and control access to it. By default the firewall:
• allows traffic that originates from your LAN computers to go to all other networks.
• blocks traffic that originates on other networks from going to the LAN.
The following figure illustrates the default firewall action. User A can initiate an IM
(Instant Messaging) session from the LAN to the WAN (1). Return traffic for this session is also allowed (2). However other traffic initiated from the WAN is blocked
(3 and 4).
Figure 91 Default Firewall Action
LAN
A
1
2
WAN
3
4
16.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the Firewall screen to configure the security level of the firewall on the
ZyXEL Device (
• Use the Protocol screen to add or remove predefined Internet services and configure firewall rules (
• Use the Access Control screen to view and configure incoming/outgoing filtering rules (
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
215
Chapter 16 Firewall
16.1.2 What You Need to Know
SYN Attack
A SYN attack floods a targeted system with a series of SYN packets. Each packet causes the targeted system to issue a SYN-ACK response. While the targeted system waits for the ACK that follows the SYN-ACK, it queues up all outstanding
SYN-ACK responses on a backlog queue. SYN-ACKs are moved off the queue only when an ACK comes back or when an internal timer terminates the three-way handshake. Once the queue is full, the system will ignore all incoming SYN requests, making the system unavailable for legitimate users.
DoS
Denials of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at devices and networks with a connection to the Internet. Their goal is not to steal information, but to disable a device or network so users no longer have access to network resources. The
ZyXEL Device is pre-configured to automatically detect and thwart all known DoS attacks.
DDoS
A DDoS attack is one in which multiple compromised systems attack a single target, thereby causing denial of service for users of the targeted system.
LAND Attack
In a LAND attack, hackers flood SYN packets into the network with a spoofed source IP address of the target system. This makes it appear as if the host computer sent the packets to itself, making the system unavailable while the target system tries to respond to itself.
Ping of Death
Ping of Death uses a "ping" utility to create and send an IP packet that exceeds the maximum 65,536 bytes of data allowed by the IP specification. This may cause systems to crash, hang or reboot.
SPI
Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI) tracks each connection crossing the firewall and makes sure it is valid. Filtering decisions are based not only on rules but also context. For example, traffic from the WAN may only be allowed to cross the firewall in response to a request from the LAN.
216
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 16 Firewall
16.2 The Firewall Screen
Use this screen to set the security level of the firewall on the ZyXEL Device.
Firewall rules are grouped based on the direction of travel of packets to which they apply.
Click Security Settings > Firewall to display the following screen.
Figure 92 Security Settings > Firewall
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 65 Security Settings > Firewall
LABEL
Low
Medium
High
Apply
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
Select Low to allow LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions.
Select Medium to allow LAN to WAN but deny WAN to LAN packet directions.
Select High to deny LAN to WAN and WAN to LAN packet directions.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
16.3 The Protocol Screen
You can configure customized services and port numbers in the Protocol screen.
For a comprehensive list of port numbers and services, visit the IANA (Internet
Assigned Number Authority) website. See
for some examples.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
217
Chapter 16 Firewall
Click Security Settings > Firewall > Protocol to display the following screen.
Figure 93 Security Settings > Firewall > Protocol
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 66 Security Settings > Firewall > Protocol
LABEL
Add New
Protocol
Entry
DESCRIPTION
Click this to add a new protocol.
Name This is the name of your customized service.
Description This is the description of your customized service.
Ports/
Protocol
Number
Modify
This shows the IP protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or TCP/UDP) and the port number or range of ports that defines your customized service. Other and the protocol number displays if the service uses another IP protocol.
Click the Edit icon to edit the entry.
Click the Delete icon to remove this entry.
218
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 16 Firewall
16.3.1 Add a Protocol
Use this screen to add a customized service rule that you can use in the firewall’s
ACL rule configuration. Click Add New Protocol Entry in the Protocol screen to display the following screen.
Figure 94 Security Settings > Firewall > Protocol > Add
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 67 Security Settings > Firewall > Protocol > Add
LABEL
Add Protocol
Protocol
DESCRIPTION
Source/
Destination
Port
Choose the IP protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or Other) that defines your customized port from the drop-down list box. Select Other to be able to enter a protocol number.
These fields are displayed if you select TCP or UDP as the IP port.
Select Single to specify one port only or Range to specify a span of ports that define your customized service. If you select Any, the service is applied to all ports.
Protocol
Number
Type a single port number or the range of port numbers that define your customized service.
This field is displayed if you select Other as the protocol.
Enter the protocol number of your customized port.
Click this to add the protocol to the Rule List below.
Add
Rule List
Protocol This is the IP port (TCP, UDP, ICMP, or Other) that defines your customized port.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
219
Chapter 16 Firewall
Table 67 Security Settings > Firewall > Protocol > Add
LABEL
Ports/
Protocol
Number
Modify
Service
Name
Service
Description
Apply
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
For TCP, UDP, ICMP, or TCP/UDP protocol rules this shows the port number or range that defines the custom service. For other IP protocol rules this shows the protocol number.
Click the Delete icon to remove the rule.
Enter a unique name (up to 32 printable English keyboard characters, including spaces) for your customized port.
Enter a description for your customized port.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
16.4 The Access Control Screen
Click Security Settings > Firewall > Access Control to display the following screen. This screen displays a list of the configured incoming or outgoing filtering rules.
Figure 95 Security Settings > Firewall > Access Control
220
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 68 Security Settings > Firewall > Access Control
LABEL DESCRIPTION
DoS Protection DoS (Denial of Service) attacks can flood your Internet connection with invalid packets and connection requests, using so much bandwidth and so many resources that Internet access becomes unavailable.
Select the Enable check box to enable protection against DoS attacks.
Click this to go to add a filter rule for incoming or outgoing IP traffic.
Add New ACL
Rule
Name This displays the name of the rule.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 16 Firewall
Table 68 Security Settings > Firewall > Access Control
LABEL
Src IP
Dst IP
Protocol
Direction
Action
Modify
DESCRIPTION
This displays the source IP addresses to which this rule applies. Please note that a blank source address is equivalent to Any.
This displays the destination IP addresses to which this rule applies.
Please note that a blank destination address is equivalent to Any.
This displays the transport layer protocol that defines the service to which this rule applies.
This displays the direction of traffic to which this rule applies.
This field displays whether the rule silently discards packets (DROP), discards packets and sends a TCP reset packet or an ICMP destinationunreachable message to the sender (REJECT) or allows the passage of packets (ACCEPT).
Click the Edit icon to edit the rule.
Apply
Cancel
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule. Note that subsequent rules move up by one when you take this action.
Click Apply to save the DoS Protection settings.
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
221
Chapter 16 Firewall
16.4.1 Add/Edit an ACL Rule
Click Add New ACL Rule or the Edit icon next to an existing ACL rule in the
Access Control screen. The following screen displays.
Figure 96 Security Settings > Firewall > Access Control > Add/Edit
222
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 69 Security Settings > Firewall > Access Control > Add/Edit
LABEL
General
Filter Name
DESCRIPTION
Enter a descriptive name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters, not including spaces, underscores, and dashes.
Select Source
Device
Source IP
Address
Select
Destination
Device
Destination IP
Address
You must enter the filter name to add an ACL rule. This field is readonly if you are editing the ACL rule.
Select the source device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select
Specific IP Address, enter the source IP address in the field below.
Enter the source IP address.
Select the destination device to which the ACL rule applies. If you select Specific IP Address, enter the destiniation IP address in the field below.
Enter the destination IP address.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 16 Firewall
Table 69 Security Settings > Firewall > Access Control > Add/Edit (continued)
LABEL
Select Protocol
DESCRIPTION
Select the transport layer protocol that defines your customized port from the drop-down list box. The specific protocol rule sets you add in the Security Settings > Firewall > Protocol > Add screen display in this list.
Protocol
If you want to configure a customized protocol, select Specific
Protocol.
This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in
Select Protocol.
Custom Source
Port
Choose the IP port (TCP/UDP, TCP, UDP, or ICMP) that defines your customized port from the drop-down list box.
This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in
Select Protocol.
Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the source.
This field is displayed only when you select Specific Protocol in
Select Protocol.
Custom
Destination Port
Policy
Enter a single port number or the range of port numbers of the destination.
Use the drop-down list box to select whether to discard (DROP), deny and send an ICMP destination-unreachable message to the sender of
(REJECT) or allow the passage of (ACCEPT) packets that match this rule.
Direction Use the drop-down list box to select the direction of traffic to which this rule applies.
Enable Rate Limit Select this check box to set a limit on the upstream/downstream transmission rate for the specified protocol.
Specify how many packets per minute or second the transmission rate is.
Scheduler Rules Select a schedule rule for this ACL rule form the drop-down list box.
You can configure a new schedule rule by click Add new rule. This will bring you to the Security Settings > Scheduler Rules screen.
Apply
Cancel
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
223
Chapter 16 Firewall
224
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 1 7
MAC Filter
17.1 Overview
This screen allows you to configure the ZyXEL Device to give exclusive access to specific devices or exclude specific devices from accessing the ZyXEL Device.
Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters, for example, 00:A0:C5:00:00:02. You need to know the MAC addresses of the devices to configure this screen.
17.2 The MAC Filter Screen
Use this screen to change your ZyXEL Device’s MAC filter settings. Click Security
Settings > MAC Filter. The screen appears as shown.
Figure 97
Security Settings > MAC Filter
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
225
Chapter 17 MAC Filter
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 70
Security Settings > MAC Filter
LABEL
MAC Filter Setup
MAC Filter
DESCRIPTION
Add new devices to the
Allow List automatically
Select Enable to activate the MAC filter function. Otherwise, select Disable.
Select this check box if you want the ZyXEL Device to automatically add the newly connected devices to the Allow
List.
MAC Filter Lists
Allow List The devices in this list are permitted or denied access to the
ZyXEL Device.
Block List
Select an entry from the Allow List and use the > button to add it to the Block List.
Add Device
#
Device
MAC Address
Modify
Apply
Cancel
Select an entry from the Block List and use the < button to add it to the Allow List.
Select this to display the Add Device screen which you can add a device to the MAC filter Allow List. Enter the device’s MAC address and click OK.
This is the index number of the entry.
This is the name of the device that is allowed access to the
ZyXEL Device.
This is the MAC address of the device that is allowed access to the ZyXEL Device.
Select the entry(ies) that you want to delete in the Remove column, then click the Delete icon.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
226
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 1 8
Parental Control
18.1 Overview
Parental control allows you to permit or block access to certain web sites from home network computers.
You can define time periods and days during which the ZyXEL Device performs parental control on a specific user in the Security Settings > Scheduler Rules screen (see
Chapter 19 on page 231 for detailed information).
18.2 The Parental Control Screen
Use this screen to configure parental control settings to block the users on your network from accessing certain web sites.
Click Parental Control to open the following screen.
Note: You must configure a scheduler rule in the Advanced > Scheduler Rule screen (
) before the parental control function can be enabled. Click Scheduler Rule in the note to go to the Scheduler Rule screen for configurations.
Figure 98 Parental Control
227
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 18 Parental Control
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 71 Parental Control
LABEL
Add new rule
DESCRIPTION
Click this to create a new parental control rule.
# This is the index number of the rule.
PC Name/IP/MAC The ZyXEL Device allows or prohibits the users from viewing the Web sites with the URLs listed below.
Access Type This shows the access type that is applied on the user to the web site of this rule.
Web Site This is the URL of the web site in this rule.
Scheduler Name This is the name of the schedule rule that is applied.
Modify Click the Edit icon to edit the rule.
Apply
Cancel
Click the Delete icon to delete an existing rule.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
18.2.1 Add/Edit Parental Control Rule
Click Add new rule in the Parental Control screen or click the Edit icon next to a rule to open the following screen.
Figure 99 Parental Control: Add/Edit
228
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 18 Parental Control
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 72 Parental Control: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
PC Name/IP/MAC Select the user that you want to apply this rule to from the drop-down list box. If you want to add an user that is not listed, select User
Defined and enter its MAC address.
Access Type
Web Site
Remove
Scheduler Rule
Apply
Cancel
This field is read-only if you are editing the parental control rule.
Select the access type that is applied on the user to the web site of this rule.
If you select Block Web Site, the ZyXEL Device prohibits the users from viewing the web sites with the URLs listed below.
If you select Allow Web Site, the ZyXEL Device blocks access to all
URLs except ones listed below.
If you select Block All, the ZyXEL Device blocks access to all URLs.
Enter the URL of web site to which the ZyXEL Device blocks or allows access. Click Add to add this URL to the list below.
Select an URL from the list and click Remove to delete it.
Select the scheduler rule that you want to apply from the drop-down list box. If you have not configured a scheduler rule or want to add a new one, click the Add New Rule button to go to the Scheduler
Rule screen. See Chapter 19 on page 231
for more information.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
229
Chapter 18 Parental Control
230
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 1 9
Scheduler Rules
19.1 Overview
You can define time periods and days during which the ZyXEL Device performs scheduled rules of certain features (such as Firewall Access Control, Parental
Control) on a specific user in the Scheduler Rules screen.
19.2 The Scheduler Rules Screen
Use this screen to view, add, or edit time schedule rules.
Click Advanced > Scheduler Rules to open the following screen.
Figure 100 Advanced > Scheduler Rules
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 73 Advanced > Scheduler Rules
LABEL
Add new rule
#
Rule Name
Day
Time
DESCRIPTION
Click this to create a new rule.
This is the index number of the entry.
This shows the name of the rule.
This shows the day(s) on which this rule is enabled.
This shows the period of time on which this rule is enabled.
231
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 19 Scheduler Rules
Table 73 Advanced > Scheduler Rules
LABEL
Description
Modify
DESCRIPTION
This shows the description of this rule.
Click the Edit icon to edit the schedule.
Click the Delete icon to delete a scheduler rule.
Note: You cannot delete a scheduler rule once it is applied to a certain feature.
19.2.1 Add/Edit a Schedule
Click the Add button in the Scheduler Rules screen or click the Edit icon next to a schedule rule to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure a restricted access schedule for a specific user on your network.
Figure 101 Scheduler Rules: Add/Edit
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 74 Scheduler Rules: Add/Edit
LABEL
Rule Name
Day
Time if Day
Range
Description
Apply
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
Enter a name (up to 31 printable English keyboard characters, not including spaces) for this schedule.
Select check boxes for the days that you want the ZyXEL Device to perform this scheduler rule.
Enter the time period of each day, in 24-hour format, during which parental control will be enforced.
Enter a description for this scheduler rule.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
232
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 2 0
Certificates
20.1 Overview
The ZyXEL Device can use certificates (also called digital IDs) to authenticate users. Certificates are based on public-private key pairs. A certificate contains the certificate owner’s identity and public key. Certificates provide a way to exchange public keys for use in authentication.
20.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The Local Certificates screen lets you generate certification requests and import the ZyXEL Device's CA-signed certificates (
).
• The Trusted CA screen lets you save the certificates of trusted CAs to the
ZyXEL Device (
20.2 What You Need to Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read through this chapter.
Certification Authority
A Certification Authority (CA) issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner. There are commercial certification authorities like
CyberTrust or VeriSign and government certification authorities. The certification authority uses its private key to sign certificates. Anyone can then use the certification authority's public key to verify the certificates. You can use the ZyXEL
Device to generate certification requests that contain identifying information and public keys and then send the certification requests to a certification authority.
233
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 20 Certificates
20.3 The Local Certificates Screen
Click Security Settings > Certificates to open the Local Certificates screen.
This is the ZyXEL Device’s summary list of certificates and certification requests.
Figure 102 Security Settings > Certificates > Local Certificates
234
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 75 Security Settings > Certificates > Local Certificates
LABEL
Create
Certificate
Request
Import
Certificate
DESCRIPTION
Click this button to go to the screen where you can have the ZyXEL
Device generate a certification request.
Name
In Use
Subject
Type
Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate that you have enrolled from a certification authority from your computer to the ZyXEL Device.
This field displays the name used to identify this certificate. It is recommended that you give each certificate a unique name.
This field displays whether the certificate is in use and how many applications use the certificate.
This field displays identifying information about the certificate’s owner, such as CN (Common Name), OU (Organizational Unit or department),
O (Organization or company) and C (Country). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information.
This field displays what kind of certificate this is.
request represents a certification request and is not yet a valid certificate. Send a certification request to a certification authority, which then issues a certificate. Use the Load Certificate screen to import the certificate and replace the request.
signed represents a certificate issued by a certification authority.
about the certificate (or certification request).
For a certification request, click Load Signed to import the signed certificate.
Click the Remove icon to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 20 Certificates
20.3.1 Create Certificate Request
Click Security Settings > Certificates > Local Certificates and then Create
Certificate Request to open the following screen. Use this screen to have the
ZyXEL Device generate a certification request.
Figure 103 Create Certificate Request
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 76 Create Certificate Request
LABEL
Certificate Name
DESCRIPTION
Type up to 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this certificate.
Common Name Type the IP address (in dotted decimal notation), domain name or email address in the field provided. The domain name or e-mail address can be up to 63 ASCII characters. The domain name or email address is for identification purposes only and can be any string.
Organization Name Type up to 63 characters to identify the company or group to which the certificate owner belongs. You may use any character, including spaces, but the ZyXEL Device drops trailing spaces.
State/Province
Name
Type up to 32 characters to identify the state or province where the certificate owner is located. You may use any character, including spaces, but the ZyXEL Device drops trailing spaces.
Country/Region
Name
Apply
Cancel
Select a country to identify the nation where the certificate owner is located.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
After you click Apply, the following screen displays to notify you that you need to get the certificate request signed by a Certificate Authority. If you already have, click Load_Signed to import the signed certificate into the ZyXEL Device.
Otherwise click Back to return to the Local Certificates screen.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
235
Chapter 20 Certificates
Figure 104 Certificate Request Created
20.3.2 Load Signed Certificate
After you create a certificate request and have it signed by a Certificate Authority, in the Local Certificates screen click the certificate request’s Load Signed icon to import the signed certificate into the ZyXEL Device.
236
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 20 Certificates
Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificate’s filename before you can import it.
Figure 105 Load Signed Certificate
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 77 Load Signed Certificate
LABEL
Certificate
Name
DESCRIPTION
This is the name of the signed certificate.
Certificate Copy and paste the signed certificate into the text box to store it on the
ZyXEL Device.
Apply
Back
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
20.3.3 Import Certificate
Click Security Settings > Local Certificates and then Import Certificate to open the Import Local Certificate screen. Follow the instructions in this screen to save an existing certificate to the ZyXEL Device.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
237
Chapter 20 Certificates
Note: You must remove any spaces from the certificate’s filename before you can import it.
Figure 106 Import Local Certificate
238
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 78 Import Local Certificate
LABEL
Import from file
Certificate
Name
DESCRIPTION
Click this check box to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust, from your computer to the ZyXEL
Device.
Type up to 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces) to identify this certificate.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 20 Certificates
Table 78 Import Local Certificate
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the ZyXEL
Device.
Private
Key
Apply
Cancel
Copy and paste the private key into the text box to store it on the ZyXEL
Device.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
If you click Import from file in the Import Local Certificate screen, the following screen is displayed.
Figure 107 Import Local Certificate > Import from file
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 79 Import Local Certificate > Import from file
LABEL
Certificate
File Path
Private
Key is protected by a password?
Apply
Back
DESCRIPTION
Type in the location of the certificate you want to upload in this field or click
Browse ... to find it.
Enter the private key into the text box to store it on the ZyXEL Device. The private key should not exceed 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces).
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
20.3.4 Certificate Details
Click Security Settings> Certificates > Local Certificates to open the My
Certificates screen. Click the View icon to open the Certificate Details screen.
Use this screen to view in-depth certificate information and change the certificate’s name.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
239
Chapter 20 Certificates
Figure 108 Certificate Details
240
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 80 Certificate Details
LABEL
Name
Type
Subject
Certificate
DESCRIPTION
This field displays the identifying name of this certificate. If you want to change the name, type up to 63 characters to identify this certificate. You may use any character (not including spaces).
This field displays general information about the certificate. signed means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate. request means this is a certification request.
This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organization (O), State (ST) and Country (C).
This read-only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced
Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a printable form.
This displays null in a certification request.
You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example).
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 20 Certificates
Table 80 Certificate Details (continued)
LABEL
Private Key
DESCRIPTION
This read-only text box displays the private key in Privacy Enhanced
Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a printable form.
Signing Request
Back
You can copy and paste the private key into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example).
This read-only text box displays the request information in Privacy
Enhanced Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a printable form.
This displays null in a signed certificate.
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
20.4 The Trusted CA Screen
Click Security Settings > Certificates > Trusted CA to open the following screen. This screen displays a summary list of certificates of the certification authorities that you have set the ZyXEL Device to accept as trusted. The ZyXEL
Device accepts any valid certificate signed by a certification authority on this list as being trustworthy; thus you do not need to import any certificate that is signed by one of these certification authorities.
Figure 109 Security Settings > Certificates > Trusted CA
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 81 Security Settings > Certificates > Trusted CA
LABEL
Import
Certificate
Name
DESCRIPTION
Click this button to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust to the ZyXEL Device.
This field displays the name used to identify this certificate.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
241
Chapter 20 Certificates
Table 81 Security Settings > Certificates > Trusted CA (continued)
LABEL
Subject
Type
Action
DESCRIPTION
This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), OU (Organizational Unit or department), Organization (O), State (ST) and Country (C). It is recommended that each certificate have unique subject information.
This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate.
Click the View icon to open a screen with an in-depth list of information about the certificate (or certification request).
Click the Remove button to delete the certificate (or certification request). You cannot delete a certificate that one or more features is configured to use.
20.4.1 View Trusted CA Certificate
Click the View icon in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. Use this screen to view in-depth information about the certification authority’s certificate.
Figure 110 Trusted CA: View
242
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 82 Trusted CA: View
LABEL
Name
Type
DESCRIPTION
This field displays the identifying name of this certificate.
This field displays general information about the certificate. ca means that a Certification Authority signed the certificate.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 20 Certificates
Table 82 Trusted CA: View (continued)
LABEL
Subject
Certificate
DESCRIPTION
This field displays information that identifies the owner of the certificate, such as Common Name (CN), Organizational Unit (OU),
Organization (O) and Country (C).
This read-only text box displays the certificate in Privacy Enhanced
Mail (PEM) format. PEM uses base 64 to convert the binary certificate into a printable form.
Back
You can copy and paste the certificate into an e-mail to send to friends or colleagues or you can copy and paste the certificate into a text editor and save the file on a management computer for later distribution (via floppy disk for example).
Click Back to return to the previous screen.
20.4.2 Import Trusted CA Certificate
Click the Import Certificate button in the Trusted CA screen to open the following screen. The ZyXEL Device trusts any valid certificate signed by any of the imported trusted CA certificates.
Figure 111 Trusted CA: Import Certificate
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
243
Chapter 20 Certificates
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 83 Trusted CA: Import Certificate
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Import from file Click this check box to open a screen where you can save the certificate of a certification authority that you trust, from your computer to the ZyXEL Device.
Certificate Name Enter the name that identifies this certificate. The certificate name should not exceed 63 ASCII characters (not including spaces).
Certificate Copy and paste the certificate into the text box to store it on the
ZyXEL Device.
Apply
Cancel
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
If you click Import from file in the Import Local Certificate screen, the following screen is displayed.
Figure 112 Trusted CA: Import Certificate > Import from file
244
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 84 Import Local Certificate
LABEL
Certificate
File Path
Apply
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
Type in the location of the certificate you want to upload in this field or click
Browse ... to find it.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 2 1
IPSec
21.1 Overview
A virtual private network (VPN) provides secure communications between sites without the expense of leased site-to-site lines. A secure VPN is a combination of tunneling, encryption, authentication, access control and auditing. It is used to transport traffic over the Internet or any insecure network that uses TCP/IP for communication.
Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) is a standards-based VPN that offers flexible solutions for secure data communications across a public network like the
Internet. IPSec is built around a number of standardized cryptographic techniques to provide confidentiality, data integrity and authentication at the IP layer. The following figure is an example of an IPSec VPN tunnel.
Figure 113 VPN: Example
VPN Tunnel
X Y
21.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the Status screen to display and manage the current active VPN
connections ( Section 21.2 on page 247 ).
• Use the Settings screen to view the configured IPSec policies and add, edit or remove a policy (
).
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
245
Chapter 21 IPSec
21.1.2 What You Need to Know
A VPN tunnel is usually established in two phases. Each phase establishes a security association (SA), a contract indicating what security parameters the
ZyXEL Device and the remote IPSec router will use. The first phase establishes an
Internet Key Exchange (IKE) SA between the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router. The second phase uses the IKE SA to securely establish an IPSec SA through which the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router can send data between computers on the local network and remote network. The following figure illustrates this.
Figure 114 VPN: IKE SA and IPSec SA
A
B
IPSec SA
246
X Y
IKE SA
In this example, a computer in network A is exchanging data with a computer in network B. Inside networks A and B, the data is transmitted the same way data is normally transmitted in the networks. Between routers X and Y, the data is protected by tunneling, encryption, authentication, and other security features of the IPSec SA. The IPSec SA is established securely using the IKE SA that routers X and Y established first.
Remote IPSec Gateway Address
Remote IPSec Gateway Address is the WAN IP address or domain name of the remote IPSec router (secure gateway).
If the remote secure gateway has a static WAN IP address, enter it in the Remote
IPSec Gateway Address field. You may alternatively enter the remote secure gateway’s domain name (if it has one) in the Remote IPSec Gateway Address field.
You can also enter a remote secure gateway’s domain name in the Remote IPSec
Gateway Address field if the remote secure gateway has a dynamic WAN IP address and is using DDNS. The ZyXEL Device has to rebuild the VPN tunnel each time the remote secure gateway’s WAN IP address changes (there may be a delay until the DDNS servers are updated with the remote gateway’s new WAN IP address).
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 21 IPSec
Finding Out More
See Section 21.4 on page 256 for advanced technical information on IPSec VPN.
21.2 The IPSec Status Screen
Click Security Settings > IPSec > Status to open the screen as shown. Use this screen to display and manage active VPN connections.
A Security Association (SA) is the group of security settings related to a specific
VPN tunnel. This screen displays active VPN connections. Use Refresh to display active VPN connections. This screen is read-only. The following table describes the fields in this tab.
Figure 115 Security Settings > IPSec > Status
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 85 Security Settings > IPSec > Status
LABEL
Refresh
Interval
Status
DESCRIPTION
Select how often the screen should be refreshed from the drop-down list box.
This field displays whether the VPN connection is up (a yellow bulb) or down (a gray bulb).
This field displays the identification name for this VPN policy. Connection
Name
Remote
Gateway
Local
Addresses
Remote
Addresses
Action
This is the static WAN IP address or URL of the remote IPSec router.
This is the IP address of computer(s) on your local network behind your
ZyXEL Device.
This is the IP address of computer(s) on the remote network behind the remote IPSec router.
Click Trigger to establish a VPN connection with the remote network.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
247
Chapter 21 IPSec
21.3 The IPSec Settings Screen
The following figure helps explain the main fields in the web configurator.
Figure 116 IPSec Summary Fields
Local Network Remote Network
Remote
IPSec Router
Local IP Address
VPN Tunnel
My IP Address
Remote IP Address
Secure Gateway IP Address
Local and remote IP addresses must be static.
Click Security Settings > IPSec to open the Settings screen. This is a menu of your IPSec tunnels.
Figure 117 Security Settings > IPSec > Settings
248
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 86 Security Settings > IPSec > Settings
LABEL
Add New
Connection
#
Status
DESCRIPTION
Click this to configure a new VPN policy.
This is the index number of the entry.
This field displays whether the VPN policy is active or not. A yellow bulb signifies that this VPN policy is active. A gray bulb signifies that this VPN policy is not active.
This field displays the identification name for this VPN policy. Connection
Name
Remote
Gateway
This is the static WAN IP address or URL of the remote IPSec router.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 21 IPSec
Table 86 Security Settings > IPSec > Settings
LABEL
Local
Addresses
Remote
Addresses
Modify
DESCRIPTION
This is the IP address of computer(s) on your local network behind your
ZyXEL Device.
This is the IP address of computer(s) on the remote network behind the remote IPSec router.
Click the Edit icon to edit the VPN configuration.
Click the Delete icon to remove an existing VPN configuration.
21.3.1 Add/Edit IPSec Setting
Click Add New Connection or a policy’s Edit icon in the IPSec > Settings screen to edit VPN policies.
Note: The ZyXEL Device uses the system default gateway interface’s WAN IP address as its WAN IP address to set up a VPN tunnel.
21.3.1.1 Auto(IKE) Key Setup
Auto(IKE) provides more protection so it is generally recommended. You only configure VPN manual key when you select Auto(IKE) in the Key Exchange
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
249
Chapter 21 IPSec
Method field on the IPSec > Setting: Add/Edit screen. The following is the
IPSec Setting - Auto(IKE) screen.
Figure 118 Settings > Add/Edit: Auto(IKE)
250
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 87 Settings > Add/Edit: Auto(IKE)
LABEL
Enable
IPSec
Connection
Name
Remote IPSec
Gateway
Address
DESCRIPTION
Select this check box to activate this VPN policy. This option determines whether a VPN rule is applied before a packet leaves the firewall.
Type up to 39 alphanumeric characters to identify this VPN policy. You may use spaces, underscores and dashes, but the ZyXEL Device drops trailing spaces.
Type the WAN IP address or the URL (up to 31 characters) of the IPSec router with which you're making the VPN connection.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 21 IPSec
Table 87 Settings > Add/Edit: Auto(IKE)
LABEL
Tunnel access from local IP addresses
DESCRIPTION
Specify the IP addresses of the devices behind the ZyXEL Device that can use the VPN tunnel. The local IP addresses must correspond to the remote IPSec router's configured remote IP addresses.
IP Address for VPN
IP Subnet mask
Tunnel access from remote IP addresses
IP Address for VPN
IP
Subnetmask
Protocol
Key Exchange
Method
Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address(es) both the same. Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address, but not both. You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses, as long as only one is active at any time.
Use the drop-down list box to choose Single Address or Subnet.
Select Single Address for a single IP address. Select Subnet to specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask.
When the local IP address type is configured to Single Address, enter a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device.
When the local IP address type is configured to Subnet, enter a
(static) IP address on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device.
When the local IP address type is configured to Single Address, this field is not available.
When the local IP address type is configured to Subnet, enter a subnet mask on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device.
Specify the IP addresses of the devices behind the remote IPSec router that can use the VPN tunnel. The remote IP addresses must correspond to the remote IPSec router's configured local IP addresses.
Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address(es) both the same. Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address, but not both. You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses, as long as only one is active at any time.
Use the drop-down list box to choose Single Address or Subnet.
Select Single Address with a single IP address. Select Subnet to specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask.
When the remote IP address type is configured to Single Address, enter a (static) IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router.
When the remote IP address type is configured to Subnet, enter a
(static) IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router.
When the remote IP address type is configured to Single Address, this field is not available.
When the remote IP address type is configured to Subnet, enter a subnet mask on the network behind the remote IPSec router.
This field displays ESP and the ZyXEL Device uses ESP (Encapsulation
Security Payload) for VPN. The ESP protocol (RFC 2406) provides encryption as well as some of the services offered by AH.
Select Auto(IKE) or Manual from the drop-down list box. Auto(IKE) provides more protection so it is generally recommended. Manual is a useful option for troubleshooting if you have problems using
Auto(IKE) key management.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
251
Chapter 21 IPSec
Table 87 Settings > Add/Edit: Auto(IKE)
LABEL
Authentication
Method
DESCRIPTION
Select Pre-Shared Key to use a pre-shared key for authentication. A pre-shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation. It is called "pre-shared" because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection.
Select Certificates (X.509) to use a certificate for authentication.
Pre-Shared Key This field is available only when you select Pre-Shared Key in the
Authentication Method field.
Local/Remote ID
Type
Type up to 15 alphanumeric characters for the pre-shared key. Both ends of the VPN tunnel must use the same pre-shared key. You will receive a “PYLD_MALFORMED” (payload malformed) packet if the same pre-shared key is not used on both ends.
Select IP to identify this ZyXEL Device by its IP address.
Select DNS to identify this ZyXEL Device by a domain name.
Select E-mail to identify this ZyXEL Device by an e-mail address.
Local/Remote ID
Content
Select ASN1DN (Abstract Syntax Notation one - Distinguished Name) to identify the remote IPSec router by the subject field in a certificate.
This is used only with certificate-based authentication.
When you select IP in the Local/Remote ID Type field, type the IP address of your computer in the Local/Remote ID Content field.
Advanced IKE
Settings
NAT_Traversal
When you select DNS or E-mail in the Local/Remote ID Type field, type a domain name or e-mail address by which to identify this ZyXEL
Device in the Local/Remote ID Content field. Use up to 31 ASCII characters including spaces, although trailing spaces are truncated.
The domain name or e-mail address is for identification purposes only and can be any string.
Click Show Advanced Settings to display and configure more detailed settings of your IKE key management. Otherwise, click Hide
Advanced Settings.
Select Enable if you want to set up a VPN tunnel when there are NAT routers between the ZyXEL Device and remote IPSec router. The remote IPSec router must also enable NAT traversal, and the NAT routers have to forward UDP port 500 packets to the remote IPSec router behind the NAT router. Otherwise, select Disable.
Phase 1/Phase 2
Mode Select Main or Aggressive from the drop-down list box. Multiple SAs connecting through a secure gateway must have the same negotiation mode.
252
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 21 IPSec
Table 87 Settings > Add/Edit: Auto(IKE)
LABEL
Encryption
Algorithm
DESCRIPTION
Select DES, 3DES, AES-128, ES-192 or AES-256 from the dropdown list box.
Integrity
Algorithm
Select Diffie-
Hellman Group for Key
Exchange
Key Life Time
(Seconds)
Apply
Cancel
When you use one of these encryption algorithms for data communications, both the sending device and the receiving device must use the same secret key, which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and verify a message authentication code. The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56-bit key.
Triple DES (3DES) is a variation on DES that uses a 168-bit key. As a result, 3DES is more secure than DES. It also requires more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput. This implementation of AES uses a 128-bit, 192-bit or
256-bit key. AES is faster than 3DES.
Select SHA1 or MD5 from the drop-down list box. MD5 (Message
Digest 5) and SHA1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data. The SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stronger than MD5, but is slower. Select MD5 for minimal security and SHA1 for maximum security.
You must choose a key group for key exchange in SA setup. 768bit refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 1 a 768 bit random number. 1024bit refers to Diffie-Hellman Group 2 a 1024 bit (1Kb) random number.
Other options include 1536, 2048, and 3072 bit Diffie-Hellman groups.
Define the length of time before an IKE or IPSec SA automatically renegotiates in this field. It may range from 1 to 2,000,000,000 seconds.
A short SA Life Time increases security by forcing the two VPN gateways to update the encryption and authentication keys. However, every time the VPN tunnel renegotiates, all users accessing remote resources are temporarily disconnected.
Click Apply/Save to save your changes and return to the IPSec screen.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
21.3.1.2 Manual Key Setup
Manual key management is useful if you have problems with Auto(IKE) key management.
21.3.1.3 Security Parameter Index (SPI)
An SPI is used to distinguish different SAs terminating at the same destination and using the same IPSec protocol. This data allows for the multiplexing of SAs to a single gateway. The SPI (Security Parameter Index) along with a destination IP address uniquely identify a particular Security Association (SA). The SPI is transmitted from the remote VPN gateway to the local VPN gateway. The local VPN gateway then uses the network, encryption and key values that the administrator associated with the SPI to establish the tunnel.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
253
Chapter 21 IPSec
Current ZyXEL implementation assumes identical outgoing and incoming SPIs.
21.3.2 Configuring Manual Key
You only configure VPN manual key when you select Manual in the Key
Exchange Method field on the IPSec > Setting: Add/Edit screen. The following is the IPSec Setting - Manual screen.
Figure 119 Settings > Add/Edit: Manual
254
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 88 IPSec Settings > Add/Edit: Manual
LABEL
Enable
IPSec
Connection
Name
Remote IPSec
Gateway
Address
DESCRIPTION
Select this check box to activate this VPN policy. This option determines whether a VPN rule is applied before a packet leaves the firewall.
Type up to 39 alphanumeric characters to identify this VPN policy. You may use spaces, underscores and dashes, but the ZyXEL Device drops trailing spaces.
Type the WAN IP address or the URL (up to 31 characters) of the IPSec router with which you're making the VPN connection.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 21 IPSec
Table 88 IPSec Settings > Add/Edit: Manual
LABEL
Tunnel access from local IP addresses
DESCRIPTION
Specify the IP addresses of the devices behind the ZyXEL Device that can use the VPN tunnel. The local IP addresses must correspond to the remote IPSec router's configured remote IP addresses.
IP Address for VPN
IP
Subnetmask
Tunnel access from remote IP addresses
IP Address for VPN
IP
Subnetmask
Protocol
Key Exchange
Method
Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address(es) both the same. Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address, but not both. You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses, as long as only one is active at any time.
Use the drop-down list box to choose Single Address or Subnet.
Select Single Address for a single IP address. Select Subnet to specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask.
When the local IP address type is configured to Single Address, enter a (static) IP address on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device.
When the local IP address type is configured to Subnet, enter a
(static) IP address on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device.
When the local IP address type is configured to Single Address, this field is not available.
When the local IP address type is configured to Subnet, enter a subnet mask on the LAN behind your ZyXEL Device.
Specify the IP addresses of the devices behind the remote IPSec router that can use the VPN tunnel. The remote IP addresses must correspond to the remote IPSec router's configured local IP addresses.
Two active SAs cannot have the local and remote IP address(es) both the same. Two active SAs can have the same local or remote IP address, but not both. You can configure multiple SAs between the same local and remote IP addresses, as long as only one is active at any time.
Use the drop-down list box to choose Single Address or Subnet.
Select Single Address with a single IP address. Select Subnet to specify IP addresses on a network by their subnet mask.
When the remote IP address type is configured to Single Address, enter a (static) IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router.
When the remote IP address type is configured to Subnet, enter a
(static) IP address on the network behind the remote IPSec router.
When the remote IP address type is configured to Single Address, this field is not available.
When the remote IP address type is configured to Subnet, enter a subnet mask on the network behind the remote IPSec router.
This field displays ESP and the ZyXEL Device uses ESP (Encapsulation
Security Payload) for VPN. The ESP protocol (RFC 2406) provides encryption as well as some of the services offered by AH.
Select Auto(IKE) or Manual from the drop-down list box. Auto(IKE) provides more protection so it is generally recommended. Manual is a useful option for troubleshooting if you have problems using
Auto(IKE) key management.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
255
Chapter 21 IPSec
Table 88 IPSec Settings > Add/Edit: Manual
LABEL
Encryption
Algorithm
DESCRIPTION
Select DES, 3DES, AES(aes-cbc) or ESP_NULL from the drop-down list box.
When you use one of these encryption algorithms for data communications, both the sending device and the receiving device must use the same secret key, which can be used to encrypt and decrypt the message or to generate and verify a message authentication code. The DES encryption algorithm uses a 56-bit key.
Triple DES (3DES) is a variation on DES that uses a 168-bit key. As a result, 3DES is more secure than DES. It also requires more processing power, resulting in increased latency and decreased throughput. This implementation of AES(aes-cbc) in Cipher Block
Chaining (CBC) mode uses a 128-bit key. AES is faster than 3DES.
Select ESP_NULL to set up a tunnel without encryption. When you select ESP_NULL, you do not enter an encryption key.
Encryption Key Type 16 hexadecimal ("0-9", "A-F") characters if you select to use the
DES encryption algorithm or 48 hexadecimal characters if you use the
3DES encryption algorithm.
Authentication
Algorithm
Select SHA1 or MD5 from the drop-down list box. MD5 (Message
Digest 5) and SHA1 (Secure Hash Algorithm) are hash algorithms used to authenticate packet data. The SHA1 algorithm is generally considered stronger than MD5, but is slower. Select MD5 for minimal security and SHA1 for maximum security.
Authentication
Key
SPI
Apply
Cancel
Type 32 hexadecimal ("0-9", "A-F") characters if you select to use the
MD5 authentication algorithm or 40 hexadecimal characters if you use the SHA1 authentication algorithm.
Type a hexadecimal number from 111 to FFFFFFFF for the Security
Parameter Index.
Click Apply/Save to save your changes and return to the IPSec screen.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
21.4 Technical Reference
This section provides some technical background information about the topics covered in this chapter.
256
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
21.4.1 IPSec Architecture
The overall IPSec architecture is shown as follows.
Figure 120 IPSec Architecture
Chapter 21 IPSec
IPSec Algorithms
The ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) Protocol (RFC 2406) and AH
(Authentication Header) protocol (RFC 2402) describe the packet formats and the default standards for packet structure (including implementation algorithms).
The Encryption Algorithm describes the use of encryption techniques such as DES
(Data Encryption Standard) and Triple DES algorithms.
The Authentication Algorithms, HMAC-MD5 (RFC 2403) and HMAC-SHA-1 (RFC
2404, provide an authentication mechanism for the AH and ESP protocols.
Key Management
Key management allows you to determine whether to use IKE (ISAKMP) or manual key configuration in order to set up a VPN.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
257
Chapter 21 IPSec
21.4.2 Encapsulation
The two modes of operation for IPSec VPNs are Transport mode and Tunnel mode. At the time of writing, the ZyXEL Device supports Tunnel mode only.
Figure 121 Transport and Tunnel Mode IPSec Encapsulation
258
Transport Mode
Transport mode is used to protect upper layer protocols and only affects the data in the IP packet. In Transport mode, the IP packet contains the security protocol
(AH or ESP) located after the original IP header and options, but before any upper layer protocols contained in the packet (such as TCP and UDP).
With ESP, protection is applied only to the upper layer protocols contained in the packet. The IP header information and options are not used in the authentication process. Therefore, the originating IP address cannot be verified for integrity against the data.
With the use of AH as the security protocol, protection is extended forward into the IP header to verify the integrity of the entire packet by use of portions of the original IP header in the hashing process.
Tunnel Mode
Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire IP packet to transmit it securely. A Tunnel mode is required for gateway services to provide access to internal systems.
Tunnel mode is fundamentally an IP tunnel with authentication and encryption.
This is the most common mode of operation. Tunnel mode is required for gateway to gateway and host to gateway communications. Tunnel mode communications have two sets of IP headers:
• Outside header: The outside IP header contains the destination IP address of the VPN gateway.
• Inside header: The inside IP header contains the destination IP address of the final system behind the VPN gateway. The security protocol appears after the outer IP header and before the inside IP header.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 21 IPSec
21.4.3 IKE Phases
There are two phases to every IKE (Internet Key Exchange) negotiation – phase 1
(Authentication) and phase 2 (Key Exchange). A phase 1 exchange establishes an
IKE SA and the second one uses that SA to negotiate SAs for IPSec.
Figure 122 Two Phases to Set Up the IPSec SA
In phase 1 you must:
• Choose a negotiation mode.
• Authenticate the connection by entering a pre-shared key.
• Choose an encryption algorithm.
• Choose an authentication algorithm.
• Choose a Diffie-Hellman public-key cryptography key group (DH1 or DH2).
• Set the IKE SA lifetime. This field allows you to determine how long an IKE SA should stay up before it times out. An IKE SA times out when the IKE SA lifetime period expires. If an IKE SA times out when an IPSec SA is already established, the IPSec SA stays connected.
In phase 2 you must:
• Choose an encryption algorithm.
• Choose an authentication algorithm
• Choose a Diffie-Hellman public-key cryptography key group.
• Set the IPSec SA lifetime. This field allows you to determine how long the IPSec
SA should stay up before it times out. The ZyXEL Device automatically renegotiates the IPSec SA if there is traffic when the IPSec SA lifetime period expires. If an IPSec SA times out, then the IPSec router must renegotiate the
SA the next time someone attempts to send traffic.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
259
Chapter 21 IPSec
21.4.4 Negotiation Mode
The phase 1 Negotiation Mode you select determines how the Security
Association (SA) will be established for each connection through IKE negotiations.
• Main Mode ensures the highest level of security when the communicating parties are negotiating authentication (phase 1). It uses 6 messages in three round trips: SA negotiation, Diffie-Hellman exchange and an exchange of nonces (a nonce is a random number). This mode features identity protection
(your identity is not revealed in the negotiation).
• Aggressive Mode is quicker than Main Mode because it eliminates several steps when the communicating parties are negotiating authentication (phase 1).
However the trade-off is that faster speed limits its negotiating power and it also does not provide identity protection. It is useful in remote access situations where the address of the initiator is not know by the responder and both parties want to use pre-shared key authentication.
21.4.5 IPSec and NAT
Read this section if you are running IPSec on a host computer behind the ZyXEL
Device.
NAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both Transport and Tunnel mode.
An IPSec VPN using the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet, both data payload and headers, with a hash value appended to the packet. When using AH protocol, packet contents (the data payload) are not encrypted.
A NAT device in between the IPSec endpoints will rewrite either the source or destination address with one of its own choosing. The VPN device at the receiving end will verify the integrity of the incoming packet by computing its own hash value, and complain that the hash value appended to the received packet doesn't match. The VPN device at the receiving end doesn't know about the NAT in the middle, so it assumes that the data has been maliciously altered.
IPSec using ESP in Tunnel mode encapsulates the entire original packet
(including headers) in a new IP packet. The new IP packet's source address is the outbound address of the sending VPN gateway, and its destination address is the inbound address of the VPN device at the receiving end. When using ESP protocol with authentication, the packet contents (in this case, the entire original packet) are encrypted. The encrypted contents, but not the new headers, are signed with a hash value appended to the packet.
Tunnel mode ESP with authentication is compatible with NAT because integrity checks are performed over the combination of the "original header plus original payload," which is unchanged by a NAT device.
260
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 21 IPSec
Transport mode ESP with authentication is not compatible with NAT.
Table 89 VPN and NAT
SECURITY PROTOCOL
AH
AH
ESP
ESP
MODE
Transport
Tunnel
Transport
Tunnel
N
N
Y
NAT
N
21.4.6 VPN, NAT, and NAT Traversal
NAT is incompatible with the AH protocol in both transport and tunnel mode. An
IPSec VPN using the AH protocol digitally signs the outbound packet, both data payload and headers, with a hash value appended to the packet, but a NAT device between the IPSec endpoints rewrites the source or destination address. As a result, the VPN device at the receiving end finds a mismatch between the hash value and the data and assumes that the data has been maliciously altered.
NAT is not normally compatible with ESP in transport mode either, but the ZyXEL
Device’s NAT Traversal feature provides a way to handle this. NAT traversal allows you to set up an IKE SA when there are NAT routers between the two IPSec routers.
Figure 123 NAT Router Between IPSec Routers
A B
Normally you cannot set up an IKE SA with a NAT router between the two IPSec routers because the NAT router changes the header of the IPSec packet. NAT traversal solves the problem by adding a UDP port 500 header to the IPSec packet. The NAT router forwards the IPSec packet with the UDP port 500 header unchanged. In the above figure, when IPSec router A tries to establish an IKE SA,
IPSec router B checks the UDP port 500 header, and IPSec routers A and B build the IKE SA.
For NAT traversal to work, you must:
• Use ESP security protocol (in either transport or tunnel mode).
• Use IKE keying mode.
• Enable NAT traversal on both IPSec endpoints.
• Set the NAT router to forward UDP port 500 to IPSec router A.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
261
Chapter 21 IPSec
Finally, NAT is compatible with ESP in tunnel mode because integrity checks are performed over the combination of the "original header plus original payload," which is unchanged by a NAT device. The compatibility of AH and ESP with NAT in tunnel and transport modes is summarized in the following table.
Table 90 VPN and NAT
SECURITY
PROTOCOL
AH
AH
ESP
ESP
MODE NAT
Transport N
Tunnel N
Transport Y*
Tunnel Y
Y* - This is supported in the ZyXEL Device if you enable NAT traversal.
21.4.7 ID Type and Content
With aggressive negotiation mode (see Section 21.4.4 on page 260 ), the ZyXEL
Device identifies incoming SAs by ID type and content since this identifying information is not encrypted. This enables the ZyXEL Device to distinguish between multiple rules for SAs that connect from remote IPSec routers that have dynamic WAN IP addresses.
Regardless of the ID type and content configuration, the ZyXEL Device does not allow you to save multiple active rules with overlapping local and remote IP addresses.
With main mode (see Section 21.4.4 on page 260 ), the ID type and content are
encrypted to provide identity protection. In this case the ZyXEL Device can only distinguish between up to 12 different incoming SAs that connect from remote
IPSec routers that have dynamic WAN IP addresses. The ZyXEL Device can distinguish up to 48 incoming SAs because you can select between three encryption algorithms (DES, 3DES and AES), two authentication algorithms (MD5 and SHA1) and eight key groups when you configure a VPN rule (see
Section 21.3 on page 248 ). The ID type and content act as an extra level of identification for
incoming SAs.
The type of ID can be a domain name, an IP address or an e-mail address. The content is the IP address, domain name, or e-mail address.
Table 91 Local ID Type and Content Fields
LOCAL ID
TYPE=
IP
DNS
CONTENT=
Type the IP address of your computer.
Type a domain name (up to 31 characters) by which to identify this
ZyXEL Device.
262
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 21 IPSec
Table 91 Local ID Type and Content Fields
LOCAL ID
TYPE=
CONTENT=
Type an e-mail address (up to 31 characters) by which to identify this
ZyXEL Device.
The domain name or e-mail address that you use in the Local ID
Content field is used for identification purposes only and does not need to be a real domain name or e-mail address.
21.4.7.1 ID Type and Content Examples
Two IPSec routers must have matching ID type and content configuration in order to set up a VPN tunnel.
The two ZyXEL Devices in this example can complete negotiation and establish a
VPN tunnel.
Table 92 Matching ID Type and Content Configuration Example
ZYXEL DEVICE A ZYXEL DEVICE B
Local ID type: E-mail Local ID type: IP
Local ID content: [email protected] Local ID content: 1.1.1.2
Remote ID type: IP
Remote ID content: 1.1.1.2
Remote ID type: E-mail
Remote ID content: [email protected]
The two ZyXEL Devices in this example cannot complete their negotiation because
ZyXEL Device B’s Local ID type is IP, but ZyXEL Device A’s Remote ID type is set to E-mail. An “ID mismatched” message displays in the IPSEC LOG.
Table 93 Mismatching ID Type and Content Configuration Example
ZYXEL DEVICE A
Local ID type: IP
Local ID content: 1.1.1.10
Remote ID type: E-mail
Remote ID content: [email protected]
ZYXEL DEVICE B
Local ID type: IP
Local ID content: 1.1.1.2
Remote ID type: IP
Remote ID content: 1.1.1.0
21.4.8 Pre-Shared Key
A pre-shared key identifies a communicating party during a phase 1 IKE negotiation (see
Section 21.4.3 on page 259 for more on IKE phases). It is called
“pre-shared” because you have to share it with another party before you can communicate with them over a secure connection.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
263
Chapter 21 IPSec
21.4.9 Diffie-Hellman (DH) Key Groups
Diffie-Hellman (DH) is a public-key cryptography protocol that allows two parties to establish a shared secret over an unsecured communications channel. Diffie-
Hellman is used within IKE SA setup to establish session keys. 768-bit, 1024-bit
1536-bit, 2048-bit, and 3072-bit Diffie-Hellman groups are supported. Upon completion of the Diffie-Hellman exchange, the two peers have a shared secret, but the IKE SA is not authenticated. For authentication, use pre-shared keys.
264
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 2 2
Service Control
22.1 Overview
This chapter provides information on the Service Control screens.
Service Control allows you to manage your ZyXEL Device from a remote location through the following interfaces:
• LAN
• WAN
Note: The ZyXEL Device is managed using the Web Configurator.
22.2 The Service Control Screen
Use this screen to configure through which interface(s) users can use which service(s) to manage the ZyXEL Device.
265
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 22 Service Control
Click Security Settings > Service Control to open the following screen.
Figure 124 Security Settings > Service Control
266
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 94 Security Settings > Service Control
LABEL
General
DESCRIPTION
#
Services Name
LAN
WAN
Port
This is the index number of the entry.
This is the service you may use to access the ZyXEL Device.
Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the ZyXEL Device from the LAN.
Select the Enable check box for the corresponding services that you want to allow access to the ZyXEL Device from the WAN.
You may change the server port number for a service if needed, however you must use the same port number in order to use that service for remote management.
Certificate
HTTPS Certificate Select a certificate the HTTPS server (the ZyXEL Device) uses to authenticate itself to the HTTPS client. You must have certificates already configured in the Certificates screen.
Apply
Cancel
Click Apply to save your changes back to the ZyXEL Device.
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 2 3
ARP Table
23.1 Overview
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address (IP address) to a physical machine address, also known as a Media Access
Control or MAC address, on the local area network.
An IP (version 4) address is 32 bits long. In an Ethernet LAN, MAC addresses are
48 bits long. The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address.
23.1.1 How ARP Works
When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the device, the device's ARP program looks in the ARP Table and, if it finds the address, sends it to the device.
If no entry is found for the IP address, ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN. The device fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields, and puts the known IP address of the target in the target IP address field. In addition, the device puts all ones in the target MAC field
(FF.FF.FF.FF.FF.FF is the Ethernet broadcast address). The replying device (which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way) replaces the broadcast address with the target's MAC address, swaps the sender and target pairs, and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine.
ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the
MAC address that replied.
267
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 23 ARP Table
23.2 ARP Table Screen
Use the ARP table to view IP-to-MAC address mapping(s). To open this screen, click System Monitor > ARP Table.
Figure 125 System Monitor > ARP Table
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 95 System Monitor > ARP Table
LABEL
#
IP Address
MAC Address
Device
DESCRIPTION
This is the ARP table entry number.
This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a port.
This is the MAC address of the device with the listed IP address.
This is the type of interface used by the device. You can click on the device type to go to its configuration screen.
268
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 2 4
Logs
24.1 Overview
The web configurator allows you to choose which categories of events and/or alerts to have the ZyXEL Device log and then display the logs or have the ZyXEL
Device send them to an administrator (as e-mail) or to a syslog server.
24.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the System Log screen to see the system logs for the categories that you select (
• Use the Security Log screen to see the security-related logs for the categories
that you select ( Section 24.3 on page 271 ).
24.1.2 What You Need To Know
The following terms and concepts may help as you read this chapter.
Alerts and Logs
An alert is a type of log that warrants more serious attention. They include system errors, attacks (access control) and attempted access to blocked web sites. Some categories such as System Errors consist of both logs and alerts. You may differentiate them by their color in the View Log screen. Alerts display in red and logs display in black.
Syslog Overview
The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an
IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages. A syslog-enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog server.
Syslog is defined in RFC 3164. The RFC defines the packet format, content and system log related information of syslog messages. Each syslog message has a facility and severity level. The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server.
269
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 24 Logs
Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details. The following table describes the syslog severity levels.
Table 96 Syslog Severity Levels
5
6
7
3
4
1
2
CODE
0
SEVERITY
Emergency: The system is unusable.
Alert: Action must be taken immediately.
Critical: The system condition is critical.
Error: There is an error condition on the system.
Warning: There is a warning condition on the system.
Notice: There is a normal but significant condition on the system.
Informational: The syslog contains an informational message.
Debug: The message is intended for debug-level purposes.
24.2 The System Log Screen
Use the System Log screen to see the system logs for the categories that you select in Maintenance > Log Setting. Click System Monitor > Log to open the
System Log screen.
Figure 126 System Monitor > Log > System Log
270
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 24 Logs
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 97 System Monitor > Log > System Log
LABEL
Level
DESCRIPTION
Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the ZyXEL Device searches through all logs of that severity or higher.
Category
Clear Log
Refresh
Export Log
Select the type of logs to display.
Click this to delete all the logs.
Click this to renew the log screen.
Click this to export the selected log(s).
Email Log Now Click this to send the log file(s) to the E-mail address you specify in the
Maintenance > Logs Setting screen.
System Log
#
Time
Facility
Level
Messages
This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry.
This field displays the time the log was recorded.
The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details.
This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server.
This field states the reason for the log.
24.3 The Security Log Screen
Use the Security Log screen to see the security-related logs for the categories that you select. Click System Monitor > Log > Security Log to open the following screen.
Figure 127 System Monitor > Log > Security Log
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
271
Chapter 24 Logs
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 98 System Monitor > Log > Security Log
LABEL
Level
DESCRIPTION
Select a severity level from the drop-down list box. This filters search results according to the severity level you have selected. When you select a severity, the ZyXEL Device searches through all logs of that severity or higher.
Category
Clear Log
Refresh
Export Log
Select the type of logs to display.
Click this to delete all the logs.
Click this to renew the log screen.
Click this to export the selected log(s).
Email Log Now Click this to send the log file(s) to the E-mail address you specify in the
Maintenance > Logs Setting screen.
#
Time
Facility
This field is a sequential value and is not associated with a specific entry.
This field displays the time the log was recorded.
The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server. Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details.
Level
Messages
This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server.
This field states the reason for the log.
272
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 2 5
Traffic Status
25.1 Overview
Use the Traffic Status screens to look at network traffic status and statistics of the WAN and LAN interfaces.
25.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the WAN screen to view the WAN traffic statistics (
• Use the LAN screen to view the LAN traffic statistics (
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
273
Chapter 25 Traffic Status
25.2 The WAN Status Screen
Click System Monitor > Traffic Status to open the WAN screen. The figure in this screen shows the number of bytes received and sent on the ZyXEL Device.
Figure 128 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN
274
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 99 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Connected
Interface
Packets Sent
Data
Error
This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently connected.
This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface.
Drop
Packets Received
This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.
Data
Error
This indicates the number of received packets on this interface.
This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface.
Drop more.../less
Disabled
Interface
This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
Click more... to show more information. Click less to hide them.
This shows the name of the WAN interface that is currently disconnected.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 25 Traffic Status
Table 99 System Monitor > Traffic Status > WAN
LABEL
Packets Sent
DESCRIPTION
Data
Error
This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface.
Drop
Packets Received
This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.
Data
Error
Drop
This indicates the number of received packets on this interface.
This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface.
This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
275
Chapter 25 Traffic Status
25.3 The LAN Status Screen
Click System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN to open the following screen. The figure in this screen shows the interface that is currently connected on the ZyXEL
Device.
Figure 129 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN
276
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 100 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN
LABEL
Polls
Interval(s)
Interface
Bytes Sent
Bytes
Received more.../less
Interface
DESCRIPTION
Select how often you want the ZyXEL Device to update this screen.
This shows the LAN or WLAN interface.
This indicates the number of bytes transmitted on this interface.
This indicates the number of bytes received on this interface.
Click more... to show more information. Click less to hide them.
This shows the LAN or WLAN interface.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 25 Traffic Status
Table 100 System Monitor > Traffic Status > LAN
LABEL
Packets Sent
DESCRIPTION
Data
Error
This indicates the number of transmitted packets on this interface.
This indicates the number of frames with errors transmitted on this interface.
Drop
Packets Received
This indicates the number of outgoing packets dropped on this interface.
Data
Error
Drop
This indicates the number of received packets on this interface.
This indicates the number of frames with errors received on this interface.
This indicates the number of received packets dropped on this interface.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
277
Chapter 25 Traffic Status
278
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 2 6
IGMP Status
26.1 Overview
Use the IGMP Status screens to look at IGMP group status and traffic statistics.
26.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• Use the IGMP Group screen to look at the current list of multicast groups the
ZyXEL Device has joined and which ports have joined each (
• Use the IGMP Statistics screen to look at the current number of IGMP-related packets received for each IGMP multicast group and from each LAN host
(
26.2 The IGMP Group Screen
Use this screen to look at the current list of multicast groups the ZyXEL Device has joined and which ports have joined it. To open this screen, click System Monitor
> IGMP Group Status > IGMP Group.
Figure 130 System Monitor > IGMP Group Status > IGMP Group
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 101 System Monitor > IGMP Group Status > IGMP Group
LABEL
Interface
Multicast
Group
DESCRIPTION
This field displays the name of an interface on the ZyXEL Device that belongs to an IGMP multicast group.
This field displays the name of the IGMP multicast group to which the interface belongs.
279
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 26 IGMP Status
Table 101 System Monitor > IGMP Group Status > IGMP Group (continued)
LABEL
Filter Mode
DESCRIPTION
INCLUDE means that only the IP addresses in the Source List get to receive the multicast group’s traffic.
Source List
EXCLUDE means that the IP addresses in the Source List are not allowed to receive the multicast group’s traffic but other IP addresses can.
This is the list of IP addresses that are allowed or not allowed to receive the multicast group’s traffic depending on the filter mode.
26.3 IGMP Statistics Screen
Use this screen to look at the current number of IGMP-related packets received for each IGMP multicast group and from each LAN host. To open this screen, click
System Monitor > IGMP Group Status > IGMP Statistics.
Figure 131 System Monitor > IGMP Group Status > IGMP Statistics
280
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 102 System Monitor > IGMP Group Status > IGMP Statistics
LABEL
IGMP
Multicast
Group
Statistics
Multicast
Group
Last Report
Time
Total Time
(sec)
Total Joins
Total Leaves
IGMP LAN
Host
Statistics
DESCRIPTION
This section shows statistics about the number of IGMP-related packets received for each IGMP multicast group.
This field displays the name of the IGMP multicast group for which the
ZyXEL Device received IGMP-related packets.
This field displays when the ZyXEL Device received the latest packet for this IGMP multicast group.
This field displays the total amount of time the ZyXEL Device counted from when the IGMP multicast group was joined to when it was left.
This field displays the total number of Join packets the ZyXEL Device has received for this IGMP multicast group.
This field displays the total number of Leave packets the ZyXEL Device has received for this IGMP multicast group.
This section shows statistics about the number of IGMP-related packets received from each LAN host.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 26 IGMP Status
Table 102 System Monitor > IGMP Group Status > IGMP Statistics (continued)
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Host Address This field displays the IP address of a LAN computer that has sent the
ZyXEL Device IGMP-related packets.
Last Report
Time
Total Time
(sec)
Total Joins
Total Leaves
This field displays when the ZyXEL Device received the latest packet from this LAN IP address for this IGMP multicast group.
This field displays the total amount of time the ZyXEL Device counted from when the LAN IP address joined the IGMP multicast group to when it left.
This field displays the total number of Join packets the ZyXEL Device has received from this LAN IP address.
This field displays the total number of Leave packets the ZyXEL Device has received from this LAN IP address.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
281
Chapter 26 IGMP Status
282
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 2 7
Users Configuration
27.1 Overview
In the Users Configuration screen, you can view, add, and configure user accounts of the ZyXEL Device.
27.2 The Users Configuration Screen
Click Maintenance > Users Configuration to open the following screen.
Figure 132 Maintenance > Users Configuration
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
283
Chapter 27 Users Configuration
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 103 Maintenance > Users Configuration
LABEL
Advanced
Account
Security
DESCRIPTION
Turn on advanced account security to enforce tighter security for the
ZyXEL Device’s user accounts. This includes:
• The user names must be a minimum length of six characters and include both letters and numbers.
• The number of dots that appears when you type the password in the login screen’s password field changes randomly to prevent anyone watching the password field from knowing the length of your password.
• The ZyXEL Device notifies users when their passwords expire and forces them to change to a new one in order to log in.
• The new password the user selects cannot match any of the user’s three previously used passwords.
Add new user Click this to configure a new user account.
# This is the index number of the entry.
User Name
Expire Time
This field displays the name of the user.
This field indicates the date that this user’s password will expire. If there is no expire date, Not Available will be displayed.
Expire Period This field indicates how many days this user’s password is available.
Retry Times This field indicates how many times a user can re-enter his/her account information before the ZyXEL Device locks the user out.
Idle Timeout This field indicates the number of minutes that the system can idle before being logged out.
Lock Period This field indicates the number of minutes for the lockout period. A user cannot log into the ZyXEL Device during the lockout period, even if he/ she enters correct account information.
Group This field displays the login account type of the user.
Modify
Different login account types have different privilege levels. The web configurator screens and privileges vary depending on which account type you use to log in.
Click the Edit icon to edit this user account.
284
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 27 Users Configuration
27.2.1 Add/Edit a Users Account
Use this screen to add or edit a users account. Click Add new user in the Users
Configuration screen or the Edit icon next to the user account you want to edit.
The screen shown next appears.
Figure 133 Users Configuration: Add/Edit
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 104 Users Configuration: Add/Edit
LABEL
User Name
DESCRIPTION
This field is read-only if you are editing the user account.
Password
Enter a descriptive name for the user account. The user name can be up to 15 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, a-z, -, _ with no spaces). With advanced account security enabled, the user names must be a minimum length of six characters and include both letters and numbers.
Specify the password associated to this account. The password can be 6 to 15 alphanumeric characters (0-9, A-Z, a-z, -, _ with no spaces), not containing the user name. It must contain both letters and numbers.
The characters are displayed as asterisks (*) in this field.
Old Password This field is displayed only when you are editing the user account.
Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field.
Verify
Password
Enter the exact same password that you just entered in the above field.
New Password This field is displayed only when you are editing the user account.
Verify New
Password
Type your new system password (6 to 15 alphanumeric characters (0-9,
A-Z, a-z, -, _ with no spaces), not containing the user name).
This field is displayed only when you are editing the user account.
Enter the exact same password that you just entered in the above field.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
285
Chapter 27 Users Configuration
Table 104 Users Configuration: Add/Edit
LABEL DESCRIPTION
Expire Period Enter a number of days to specify how many days this user’s password is available.
Retry Times The ZyXEL Device can lock a user out if you use a wrong user name or password to log in the ZyXEL Device.
Idle Timeout
Lock Period
Group
Apply
Cancel
Enter up to how many times a user can re-enter his/her account information before the ZyXEL Device locks the user out.
Enter the number of minutes that the system can idle before being logged out.
Enter the number of minutes for the lockout period. A user cannot log into the ZyXEL Device during the lockout period, even if he/she enters correct account information.
This field is read-only if you are editing the user account.
Select a type of login account. The web configurator screens and privileges vary depending on which account type you use to log in.
Administrator accounts can configure the ZyXEL Device while User accounts can only view some status information.
Users logged in with either type of account can access the Internet.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
286
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 2 8
Remote Management
28.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to configure the ZyXEL Device’s TR-069 and TR-064 auto-configuration settings.
28.1.1 What You Can Do in this Chapter
• The TR-069 screen lets you configure the ZyXEL Device’s TR-069 auto-
configuration settings ( Section 28.2 on page 287 ).
• The TR-064 screen lets you enable management via TR-064 on the ZyXEL
Device ( Section 28.3 on page 289
).
28.2 The TR-069 Clients Screen
TR-069 defines how Customer Premise Equipment (CPE), for example your ZyXEL
Device, can be managed over the WAN by an Auto Configuration Server (ACS).
TR-069 is based on sending Remote Procedure Calls (RPCs) between an ACS and a client device. RPCs are sent in Extensible Markup Language (XML) format over
HTTP or HTTPS.
An administrator can use an ACS to remotely set up the ZyXEL Device, modify settings, perform firmware upgrades as well as monitor and diagnose the ZyXEL
Device. You have to enable the device to be managed by the ACS and specify the
ACS IP address or domain name and username and password.
287
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 28 Remote Management
Click Maintenance > Remote Management > TR-069 Client to open the following screen. Use this screen to configure your ZyXEL Device to be managed by an ACS.
Figure 134 Maintenance > Remote Management > TR-069 Client
288
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 105 Maintenance > Remote Management > TR-069 Client
LABEL
Inform
DESCRIPTION
Select Enable for the ZyXEL Device to send periodic inform via TR-069 on the WAN. Otherwise, select Disable.
Inform Interval
ACS URL
ACS User Name Enter the TR-069 user name for authentication with the autoconfiguration server.
ACS Password
WAN Interface used by TR-069 client
Display SOAP messages on serial console
Enter the time interval (in seconds) at which the ZyXEL Device sends information to the auto-configuration server.
Enter the URL or IP address of the auto-configuration server.
Enter the TR-069 password for authentication with the autoconfiguration server.
Select a WAN interface through which the TR-069 traffic passes.
If you select Any_WAN, you should also select the pre-configured
WAN connection(s).
Select Enable to show the SOAP messages on the console.
Connection
Request
Authentication
Connection
Request User
Name
Select this option to enable authentication when there is a connection request from the ACS.
Enter the connection request user name.
When the ACS makes a connection request to the ZyXEL Device, this user name is used to authenticate the ACS.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 28 Remote Management
Table 105 Maintenance > Remote Management > TR-069 Client
LABEL
Connection
Request
Password
Connection
Request URL
DESCRIPTION
Enter the connection request password.
When the ACS makes a connection request to the ZyXEL Device, this password is used to authenticate the ACS.
This shows the connection request URL.
Apply
Cancel
The ACS can use this URL to make a connection request to the ZyXEL
Device.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
28.3 The TR-064 Screen
TR-064 is a LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration protocol defined by the DSL Forum.
TR-064 is built on top of UPnP. It allows the users to use a TR-064 compliant CPE management application on their computers from the LAN to discover the CPE and configure user-specific parameters, such as the username and password.
Click Maintenance > Remote Management > TR-064 Client to open the following screen.
Figure 135 Maintenance > Remote Management > TR-064 Client
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 106 Maintenance > Remote Management > TR-064 Client
LABEL
Enable TR064
Apply
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
Select the check box to activate management via TR-064 on the LAN.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
289
Chapter 28 Remote Management
290
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 2 9
Time Settings
29.1 Overview
This chapter shows you how to configure system related settings, such as system time, password, name, the domain name and the inactivity timeout interval.
29.2 The Time Setting Screen
To change your ZyXEL Device’s time and date, click Maintenance > Time
Setting. The screen appears as shown. Use this screen to configure the ZyXEL
Device’s time based on your local time zone.
Figure 136 Maintenance > Time Setting
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
291
Chapter 29 Time Settings
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 107 Maintenance > Time Setting
LABEL
Current Date/Time
DESCRIPTION
System Time This field displays the time and fate of your ZyXEL Device.
Each time you reload this page, the ZyXEL Device synchronizes the time and date with the time server.
NTP Time Server
First ~ Fifth NTP time server
Select an NTP time server from the drop-down list box.
Otherwise, select Other and enter the IP address or URL (up to 29 extended ASCII characters in length) of your time server.
Select None if you don’t want to configure the time server.
Check with your ISP/network administrator if you are unsure of this information.
Time zone offset Choose the time zone of your location. This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Daylight Saving Daylight Saving Time is a period from late spring to early fall when many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening.
State
Start rule:
Select Enable if you use Daylight Saving Time.
Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you enabled Daylight Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific week in a particular month. The
Time field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March. Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United
States, set the day to Second, Sunday, the month to March and the time to 2 in the Hour field.
Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March. All of the time zones in the European Union start using
Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would set the day to Last, Sunday and the month to March. The time you select in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 in the
Hour field because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or
UTC (GMT+1).
292
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 29 Time Settings
Table 107 Maintenance > Time Setting
LABEL
End rule
DESCRIPTION
Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you enabled Daylight Saving. You can select a specific date in a particular month or a specific day of a specific week in a particular month. The
Time field uses the 24 hour format. Here are a couple of examples:
Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of
November. Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight
Saving Time at 2 A.M. local time. So in the United States you would set the day to First, Sunday, the month to November and the time to 2 in the Hour field.
Apply
Cancel
Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of
October. All of the time zones in the European Union stop using
Daylight Saving Time at the same moment (1 A.M. GMT or UTC). So in the European Union you would set the day to Last, Sunday, and the month to October. The time you select in the o'clock field depends on your time zone. In Germany for instance, you would select 2 in the
Hour field because Germany's time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or
UTC (GMT+1).
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to exit this screen without saving.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
293
Chapter 29 Time Settings
294
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 3 0
Logs Setting
30.1 Overview
You can configure where the ZyXEL Device sends logs and which logs and/or immediate alerts the ZyXEL Device records in the Logs Setting screen.
30.2 The Log Settings Screen
To change your ZyXEL Device’s log settings, click Maintenance > Logs Setting.
The screen appears as shown.
Figure 137 Maintenance > Logs Setting
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
295
Chapter 30 Logs Setting
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 108 Maintenance > Logs Setting
LABEL
Syslog
Logging
Active
Mode
DESCRIPTION
The ZyXEL Device sends a log to an external syslog server.
Select the Active check box to enable syslog logging.
Select the syslog destination from the drop-down list box.
Syslog Server
IP Address
If you select Remote, the log(s) will be sent to a remote syslog server. If you select Local File, the log(s) will be saved in a local file. If you want to send the log(s) to a remote syslog server and save it in a local file, select Local File and Remote.
Enter the server name or IP address of the syslog server that will log the selected categories of logs.
UDP Port Enter the port number used by the syslog server.
E-mail Log Settings
Mail Server
System Log
Mail Subject
Security Log
Mail Subject
Enter the server name or the IP address of the mail server for the e-mail addresses specified below. If this field is left blank, logs and alert messages will not be sent via E-mail.
Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the system log email message that the ZyXEL Device sends.
Type a title that you want to be in the subject line of the security log email message that the ZyXEL Device sends.
Specify where the logs are sent from.
From
Send Log to The ZyXEL Device sends logs to the e-mail address specified in this field.
If this field is left blank, the ZyXEL Device does not send logs via E-mail.
Send Alarm to Alerts are real-time notifications that are sent as soon as an event, such as a DoS attack, system error, or forbidden web access attempt occurs.
Enter the E-mail address where the alert messages will be sent. Alerts include system errors, attacks and attempted access to blocked web sites. If this field is left blank, alert messages will not be sent via E-mail.
Alarm Interval Specify how often the alarm should be updated.
Allowed
Capacity
Before Email
Set what percent of the ZyXEL Device’s log storage space can be filled before the ZyXEL Device sends a log e-mail.
SMTP
Authentication
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is the message-exchange standard for the Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one E-mail server to another.
User Name
Select the check box to activate SMTP authentication. If mail server authentication is needed but this feature is disabled, you will not receive the E-mail logs.
Enter the user name (up to 32 characters) (usually the user name of a mail account).
Password
Clear log after sending mail
Enter the password associated with the user name above.
Select this to delete all the logs after the ZyXEL Device sends an E-mail of the logs.
Active Log and Alert
296
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 30 Logs Setting
Table 108 Maintenance > Logs Setting
LABEL
System Log
Security Log
Send immediate alert
Apply
Cancel
DESCRIPTION
Select the categories of system logs that you want to record.
Select the categories of security logs that you want to record.
Select log categories for which you want the ZyXEL Device to send E-mail alerts immediately.
Click Apply to save your changes.
Click Cancel to restore your previously saved settings.
30.2.1 Example E-mail Log
An "End of Log" message displays for each mail in which a complete log has been sent. The following is an example of a log sent by e-mail.
• You may edit the subject title.
• The date format here is Day-Month-Year.
• The date format here is Month-Day-Year. The time format is Hour-Minute-
Second.
• "
End of Log
" message shows that a complete log has been sent.
Figure 138 E-mail Log Example
Subject:
Firewall Alert From
Date:
Fri, 07 Apr 2000 10:05:42
From:
To:
1|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward
| 09:54:03 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |
2|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |default policy |forward
| 09:54:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,00> |
3|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.6 To:10.10.10.10 |match |forward
| 09:54:19 |UDP src port:03516 dest port:00053 |<1,01> |
……………………………..{snip}…………………………………..
……………………………..{snip}…………………………………..
126|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward
| 10:05:00 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |
127|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.131 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward
| 10:05:17 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |
128|Apr 7 00 |From:192.168.1.1 To:192.168.1.255 |match |forward
| 10:05:30 |UDP src port:00520 dest port:00520 |<1,02> |
End of Firewall Log
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
297
Chapter 30 Logs Setting
298
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 3 1
Firmware Upgrade
31.1 Overview
This chapter explains how to upload new firmware to your ZyXEL Device. You can download new firmware releases from your nearest ZyXEL FTP site (or www.zyxel.com) to use to upgrade your device’s performance.
Only use firmware for your device’s specific model. Refer to the label on the bottom of your ZyXEL Device.
31.2 The Firmware Screen
Click Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade to open the following screen. The upload process uses HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and may take up to two minutes. After a successful upload, the system will reboot.
Do NOT turn off the ZyXEL Device while firmware upload is in progress!
Figure 139 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade
The following table describes the labels in this screen.
Table 109 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade
LABEL
Current
Firmware
Version
File Path
DESCRIPTION
This is the present Firmware version and the date created.
Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click
Browse ... to find it.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
299
Chapter 31 Firmware Upgrade
Table 109 Maintenance > Firmware Upgrade
LABEL
Browse...
Upload
DESCRIPTION
Click this to find the .bin file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.zip) files before you can upload them.
Click this to begin the upload process. This process may take up to two minutes.
After you see the firmware updating screen, wait two minutes before logging into the ZyXEL Device again.
Figure 140 Firmware Uploading
The ZyXEL Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.
Figure 141 Network Temporarily Disconnected
After two minutes, log in again and check your new firmware version in the
Status screen.
If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the Firmware Upgrade screen.
Figure 142 Error Message
300
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 3 2
Configuration
32.1 Overview
The Configuration screen allows you to backup and restore device configurations. You can also reset your device settings back to the factory default.
32.2 The Configuration Screen
Click Maintenance > Configuration. Information related to factory defaults, backup configuration, and restoring configuration appears in this screen, as shown next.
Figure 143 Maintenance > Configuration
Backup Configuration
Backup Configuration allows you to back up (save) the ZyXEL Device’s current configuration to a file on your computer. Once your ZyXEL Device is configured and functioning properly, it is highly recommended that you back up your configuration file before making configuration changes. The backup configuration file will be useful in case you need to return to your previous settings.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
301
Chapter 32 Configuration
Click Backup to save the ZyXEL Device’s current configuration to your computer.
Restore Configuration
Restore Configuration allows you to upload a new or previously saved configuration file from your computer to your ZyXEL Device.
Table 110 Restore Configuration
LABEL
File Path
DESCRIPTION
Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click
Browse ... to find it.
Browse... Click this to find the file you want to upload. Remember that you must decompress compressed (.ZIP) files before you can upload them.
Upload Click this to begin the upload process.
Do not turn off the ZyXEL Device while configuration file upload is in progress.
After the ZyXEL Device configuration has been restored successfully, the login screen appears. Login again to restart the ZyXEL Device.
The ZyXEL Device automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect. In some operating systems, you may see the following icon on your desktop.
Figure 144 Network Temporarily Disconnected
If you uploaded the default configuration file you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default device IP address (192.168.1.1). See
for details on how to set up your computer’s IP address.
302
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 32 Configuration
If the upload was not successful, the following screen will appear. Click OK to go back to the Configuration screen.
Figure 145 Configuration Upload Error
Reset to Factory Defaults
Click the Reset button to clear all user-entered configuration information and return the ZyXEL Device to its factory defaults. The following warning screen appears.
Figure 146 Reset Warning Message
Figure 147 Reset In Process Message
You can also press the RESET button on the rear panel to reset the factory
defaults of your ZyXEL Device. Refer to Section 1.8 on page 31
for more information on the RESET button.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
303
Chapter 32 Configuration
32.3 The Reboot Screen
System restart allows you to reboot the ZyXEL Device remotely without turning the power off. You may need to do this if the ZyXEL Device hangs, for example.
Click Maintenance > Reboot. Click Reboot to have the ZyXEL Device reboot.
This does not affect the ZyXEL Device's configuration.
Figure 148 Maintenance > Reboot
304
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 3 3
Diagnostic
33.1 Overview
You can use different diagnostic methods to test a connection and see detailed results. These read-only screens display information to help you identify problems with the ZyXEL Device.
33.2 The Diagnostic Screen
Use this screen to ping, traceroute, or nslookup an IP address. Click Maintenance
> Diagnostic > Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup to open the screen shown next.
Figure 149 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
305
Chapter 33 Diagnostic
The following table describes the fields in this screen.
Table 111 Maintenance > Diagnostic > Ping & TraceRoute & NsLookup
LABEL
URL or IP
Address
Ping
TraceRoute
Nslookup
DESCRIPTION
Type the IP address of a computer that you want to perform ping, traceroute, or nslookup in order to test a connection.
Click this to ping the IP address that you entered.
Click this button to perform the traceroute function. This determines the path a packet takes to the specified computer.
Click this button to perform a DNS lookup on the IP address of a computer you enter.
306
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 3 4
Troubleshooting
This chapter offers some suggestions to solve problems you might encounter. The potential problems are divided into the following categories.
•
Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
•
•
34.1 Power, Hardware Connections, and LEDs
The ZyXEL Device does not turn on. None of the LEDs turn on.
1
Make sure the ZyXEL Device is turned on.
2
Make sure you are using the power adaptor or cord included with the ZyXEL
Device.
3
Make sure the power adaptor or cord is connected to the ZyXEL Device and plugged in to an appropriate power source. Make sure the power source is turned on.
4
Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on.
5
If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
One of the LEDs does not behave as expected.
1
Make sure you understand the normal behavior of the LED. See Section 1.7 on page 29 .
307
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 34 Troubleshooting
2
Check the hardware connections.
3
Inspect your cables for damage. Contact the vendor to replace any damaged cables.
4
Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on.
5
If the problem continues, contact the vendor.
34.2 ZyXEL Device Access and Login
I forgot the IP address for the ZyXEL Device.
1
The default LAN IP address is 192.168.1.1.
2
If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, you might get the IP address of the ZyXEL Device by looking up the IP address of the default gateway for your computer. To do this in most Windows computers, click Start > Run, enter cmd, and then enter ipconfig. The IP address of the Default Gateway might be the IP address of the ZyXEL Device (it depends on the network), so enter this IP address in your Internet browser.
3
If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See
I forgot the password.
1
The default admin password is 1234.
2
If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See
I cannot see or access the Login screen in the web configurator.
1
Make sure you are using the correct IP address.
• The default IP address is 192.168.1.1
.
308
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 34 Troubleshooting
• If you changed the IP address (
), use the new IP address.
• If you changed the IP address and have forgotten it, see the troubleshooting suggestions for
I forgot the IP address for the ZyXEL Device.
2
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See
3
Make sure your Internet browser does not block pop-up windows and has
JavaScripts and Java enabled. See
.
4
If it is possible to log in from another interface, check the service control settings for HTTP and HTTPS (Security Settings > Service Control).
5
Reset the device to its factory defaults, and try to access the ZyXEL Device with
the default IP address. See Section 1.8 on page 31 .
6
If the problem continues, contact the network administrator or vendor, or try one of the advanced suggestions.
Advanced Suggestions
• Make sure you have logged out of any earlier management sessions using the same user account even if they were through a different interface or using a different browser.
• Try to access the ZyXEL Device using another service, such as Telnet. If you can access the ZyXEL Device, check the remote management settings and firewall rules to find out why the ZyXEL Device does not respond to HTTP.
• If your computer is connected to the WAN port or is connected wirelessly, use a computer that is connected to an ETHERNET port.\
I can see the Login screen, but I cannot log in to the ZyXEL Device.
1
Make sure you have entered the password correctly. The default admin password is 1234. The field is case-sensitive, so make sure [Caps Lock] is not on.
2
You cannot log in to the web configurator while someone is using Telnet to access the ZyXEL Device. Log out of the ZyXEL Device in the other session, or ask the person who is logged in to log out.
3
Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on.
4
If this does not work, you have to reset the device to its factory defaults. See
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
309
Chapter 34 Troubleshooting
I cannot Telnet to the ZyXEL Device.
1
Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
2
Check the service control settings for Telnet. See Chapter 22 on page 265 .
I cannot use FTP to upload / download the configuration file. / I cannot use FTP to upload new firmware.
1
Ignore the suggestions about your browser.
2
Check the service control settings for FTP. See
.
34.3 Internet Access
I cannot access the Internet.
1
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See
.
2
Make sure you entered your ISP account information correctly in the Network
Settings > Broadband screen. These fields are case-sensitive, so make sure
[Caps Lock] is not on.
3
If you are trying to access the Internet wirelessly, make sure that you enabled the wireless LAN in the ZyXEL Device and your wireless client and that the wireless settings in the wireless client are the same as the settings in the ZyXEL Device.
4
5
If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
310
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 34 Troubleshooting
I cannot access the Internet through a DSL connection.
1
Make sure you have the DSL WAN port connected to a telephone jack (or the DSL or modem jack on a splitter if you have one).
2
Make sure you configured a proper DSL WAN interface (Network Settings >
Broadband screen) with the Internet account information provided by your ISP and that it is enabled.
3
Check that the LAN interface you are connected to is in the same interface group as the DSL connection (Network Settings > Interface Group).
4
If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the
DHCP feature in the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISP’s DHCP server.
I cannot access the Internet through an Ethernet WAN connection.
1
Make sure you have the ETHERNET WAN port connected to a broadband modem or router in your network.
2
Make sure you configured a proper Ethernet WAN interface (Network Settings >
Broadband screen) with the Internet account information provided by your ISP and that it is enabled.
3
Check that the LAN interface you are connected to is in the same interface group as the Ethernet WAN connection (Network Settings > Interface Group).
4
If you set up a WAN connection using bridging service, make sure you turn off the
DHCP feature in the LAN screen to have the clients get WAN IP addresses directly from your ISP’s DHCP server.
I cannot connect to the Internet using a second DSL connection.
ADSL and VDSL connections cannot work at the same time. You can only use one type of DSL connection, either ADSL or VDSL connection at one time.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
311
Chapter 34 Troubleshooting
I cannot access the Internet anymore. I had access to the Internet (with the ZyXEL
Device), but my Internet connection is not available anymore.
1
Your session with the ZyXEL Device may have expired. Try logging into the ZyXEL
Device again.
2
Check the hardware connections, and make sure the LEDs are behaving as expected. See
.
3
Turn the ZyXEL Device off and on.
4
If the problem continues, contact your ISP.
34.4 Wireless Internet Access
What factors may cause intermittent or unstabled wireless connection? How can I solve this problem?
The following factors may cause interference:
• Obstacles: walls, ceilings, furniture, and so on.
• Building Materials: metal doors, aluminum studs.
• Electrical devices: microwaves, monitors, electric motors, cordless phones, and other wireless devices.
To optimize the speed and quality of your wireless connection, you can:
• Move your wireless device closer to the AP if the signal strength is low.
• Reduce wireless interference that may be caused by other wireless networks or surrounding wireless electronics such as cordless phones.
• Place the AP where there are minimum obstacles (such as walls and ceilings) between the AP and the wireless client.
• Reduce the number of wireless clients connecting to the same AP simultaneously, or add additional APs if necessary.
• Try closing some programs that use the Internet, especially peer-to-peer applications. If the wireless client is sending or receiving a lot of information, it may have too many programs open that use the Internet.
312
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 34 Troubleshooting
What is a Server Set ID (SSID)?
An SSID is a name that uniquely identifies a wireless network. The AP and all the clients within a wireless network must use the same SSID.
What wireless security modes does my ZyXEL Device support?
Wireless security is vital to your network. It protects communications between wireless stations, access points and the wired network.
The available security modes in your ZyXEL device are as follows:
• WPA2-PSK: (recommended) This uses a pre-shared key with the WPA2 standard.
• WPA-PSK: This has the device use either WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK depending on which security mode the wireless client uses.
• WPA2: WPA2 (IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA. It requires the use of a RADIUS server and is mostly used in business networks.
• WPA: Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. It requires the use of a RADIUS server and is mostly used in business networks.
• WEP: Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption scrambles the data transmitted between the wireless stations and the access points to keep network communications private.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
313
Chapter 34 Troubleshooting
314
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
C H A P T E R 3 5
Product Specifications
The following tables summarize the ZyXEL Device’s hardware and firmware features.
35.1 Hardware Specifications
Table 112 Hardware Specifications
Dimensions 210 (L) x 153 (W) x 40 (H) mm
Weight
Power Adaptor
Output
471 g
12 V 1.5 A
Power Adaptor Input 100 ~ 240 VAC 50~60HZ
RESET Button Restores factory defaults
WLAN/WPS Button If the wireless network is turned off, press the WLAN/WPS button on the front of the ZyXEL Device for one second. Once the
WLAN/WPS LED turns green, the wireless network is active.
While the WLAN/WPS LED is green press the WLAN/WPS button for five seconds and release it to enable WPS (Wi-Fi
Protected Setup).
Antennas
Built-in Switch
To turn off the wireless network, press the WLAN/WPS button on the front of the ZyXEL Device for one to five seconds. The WLAN/
WPS LED turns off when the wireless network is off.
Two: One detachable external, 2dBi antenna and one internal,
2dBi antenna.
Four auto-negotiating, auto MDI/MDI-X 10/100 Mbps RJ-45
Ethernet ports
DSL Port
Gigabit Ethernet WAN
Port
USB Ports
One RJ-11 connector for DSL over POTS
One RJ-45 connector for GBE WAN
Operation
Temperature
One USB v2.0 port for file sharing
0º C ~ 40º C
Storage Temperature -20º ~ 60º C
315
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 35 Product Specifications
Table 112 Hardware Specifications (continued)
Operation Humidity 20% ~ 85% RH (non-condensing)
Storage Humidity 20% ~ 90% RH (non-condensing)
35.2 Firmware Specifications
316
Table 113 Firmware Specifications
Default IP Address 192.168.1.1
Default Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 (24 bits)
Default User Name admin
Default Password 1234
DHCP Server IP Pool 192.168.1.33 to 192.168.1.132
Static Routes
Device Management Use the web configurator to easily configure the rich range of features on the ZyXEL Device.
Wireless
Functionality
(wireless devices only)
Firmware Upgrade
16
Allow the IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and/or IEEE 802.11n wireless clients to connect to the ZyXEL Device wirelessly. Enable wireless security (WEP, WPA(2), WPA(2)-PSK) and/or MAC filtering to protect your wireless network.
Download new firmware (when available) from the web site and use the web configurator to put it on the ZyXEL Device.
Configuration Backup
& Restoration
Port Forwarding
DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration
Protocol)
Dynamic DNS
Support
IP Multicast
Time and Date
Note: Only upload firmware for your specific model!
Make a copy of the ZyXEL Device’s configuration. You can put it back on the ZyXEL Device later if you decide to revert back to an earlier configuration.
If you have a server (mail or web server for example) on your network, you can use this feature to let people access it from the
Internet.
Use this feature to have the ZyXEL Device assign IP addresses, an
IP default gateway and DNS servers to computers on your network. Your device can also act as a surrogate DHCP server
(DHCP Relay) where it relays IP address assignment from the actual real DHCP server to the clients.
With Dynamic DNS (Domain Name System) support, you can use a fixed URL with a dynamic IP address. You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider.
IP multicast is used to send traffic to a specific group of computers. The ZyXEL Device supports versions 2 and 3 of IGMP
(Internet Group Management Protocol) used to join multicast groups (see RFC 2236).
Get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your ZyXEL Device. You can also set the time manually.
These dates and times are then used in logs.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 35 Product Specifications
Table 113 Firmware Specifications (continued)
Logs Use logs for troubleshooting. You can send logs from the ZyXEL
Device to an external syslog server.
Universal Plug and
Play (UPnP)
QoS (Quality of
Service)
A UPnP-enabled device can dynamically join a network, obtain an
IP address and convey its capabilities to other devices on the network.
You can efficiently manage traffic on your network by reserving bandwidth and giving priority to certain types of traffic and/or to particular computers.
Remote Management This allows you to decide whether a service (HTTPS or FTP traffic for example) from a computer on a network (LAN or WAN for example) can access the ZyXEL Device.
PPPoE Support
(RFC2516)
PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) emulates a dial-up connection. It allows your ISP to use their existing network configuration with newer broadband technologies such as ADSL.
The PPPoE driver on your device is transparent to the computers on the LAN, which see only Ethernet and are not aware of PPPoE thus saving you from having to manage PPPoE clients on individual computers.
Other PPPoE Features PPPoE idle time out
Packet Filters
PPPoE dial on demand
Your device’s packet filtering function allows added network security and management.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
317
Chapter 35 Product Specifications
Table 113 Firmware Specifications (continued)
VDSL Standards ITU-T G.993.1 VDSL Annex A (North American) Standard
ITU G.993.2 (2/06) VDSL2 Annex A (North American) Standard
• Corrigendum 1 (12/06) + Amendment 1 (4/07) + Amendment
1 Corrigendum 1 (7/07)
• Corrigendum 2 (7/07) + Amendment 2 (2/08) + Amendment 4
(1/09)
Supported band plans:
• Plan 997 (symmetrical)
• Plan 998 (asymmetrical)
Supported profiles: 8a, 8b, 8c, 8d, 12a, 12b, 17a
POTS overlay, Supported US0 types: A (normal US0), M (extended
US0), - (no US0)
ITU G.994.1 (2/07) (G.hs) Handshake
Amendment 1 (11/07) + Amendment 2 (4/08)
Supported Transport Protocol Specific Transmission Convergence
(TPS-TC) functions:
PTM (via 64/65b encapsulation method defined in IEEE
802.3ah-2004)
HDLC encapsulation for pre-VDSL2 standard interoperability
Impulse Noise Protection (INP) up to 16 symbols
SNR target met, delay maximized: The maximum allowable delay will be 16 ms for down and 16ms for up.
Support for ITU-T G.INP
Dying Gasp support
Modulation: Multi-Carrier-Modulation (MCM)
Interleaving: General Convolution
Support of maximum SNRM configuration (directed by the central office)
Seamless Rate Adaptation (SRA) as described in Amendment 1 of
G.993.2
Tone Spacing: 4.3KHz/8.6KHz
318
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Chapter 35 Product Specifications
Table 113 Firmware Specifications (continued)
ADSL Standards ADSL ITU-T G.992.1 (G.dmt), Annex A and ETSI TS 101 388
V1.3.1 (05/2002)
Other Protocol
Support
Management
1TR112 (U-R2 Deutsche Telekom AG) Version 7.0 including support of Dying Gasp and report of Self-Test-Result (ATU-T
Register#3)
EOC as specified in ITU-T G.992.1 (G.dmt)
Handshake ITU G.994.1 (G.hs)
Supported Transport Protocol Specific Transmission Convergence
(TPS-TC) functions:
ATM
PTM (via 64/65b encapsulation method defined in IEEE
802.3ah-2004)
Support of Vendor ID during Handshake in the Vendor ID information block including vendor specific information as specified in 1TR112 and ITU-T G.994.1 (G.hs)
ADSL ITU-T G.992.2 (G.lite)
ADSL2 ITU-T G.992.3 (G.dmt.bis), Annex A
RE-ADSL2 ITU-T G.992.3 (G.dmt.bis), Annex L
ADSL2 ITU-T G.992.4 (G.lite.bis), Annex A
ADSL2+ ITU-T G.992.5, Annex A
Support Multi-Mode Standard: ANSI T1.413 Issue 2; G.dmt (ITU-T
G.992.1), ADSL2 (ITU-T G.992.3), ADSL2+ (ITU-T G.992.5)
Dual Latency support
PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) link layer protocol
Transparent bridging for unsupported network layer protocols
RIP I/RIP II
ICMP
ATM QoS
IP Multicasting IGMP v2 and v3
IGMP Proxy
Embedded Web Configurator
Remote Firmware Upgrade
Embedded FTP/TFTP Server for firmware upgrade and configuration file backup and restore
Syslog
TR-069
TR-064
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
319
Chapter 35 Product Specifications
The following list, which is not exhaustive, illustrates the standards supported in the ZyXEL Device.
Table 114 Standards Supported
STANDARD
RFC 1058
DESCRIPTION
RIP-1 (Routing Information Protocol)
RFC 1112
RFC 1305
RFC 1483
RFC 1631
RFC 1661
RFC 1723
RFC 2236
RFC 2364
RFC 2516
RFC 2684
RFC 2766
IEEE 802.11
IGMP v1
Network Time Protocol (NTP version 3)
Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5
IP Network Address Translator (NAT)
The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)
RIP-2 (Routing Information Protocol)
Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 2.
PPP over AAL5 (PPP over ATM over ADSL)
A Method for Transmitting PPP Over Ethernet (PPPoE)
Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5
Network Address Translation - Protocol
Also known by the brand Wi-Fi, denotes a set of Wireless LAN/
WLAN standards developed by working group 11 of the IEEE
LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802).
IEEE 802.11b
IEEE 802.11g
IEEE 802.11d
Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band
Uses the 2.4 gigahertz (GHz) band
Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks: Media
Access Control (MAC) Bridges
IEEE 802.11x
IEEE 802.11e QoS
Port Based Network Access Control.
IEEE 802.11 e Wireless LAN for Quality of Service
ANSI T1.413, Issue 2 Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) standard.
G dmt(G.992.1) G.992.1 Asymmetrical Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL)
Transceivers
ITU G.992.1 (G.DMT) ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation.
ITU G.992.2 (G. Lite) ITU standard for ADSL using discrete multitone modulation.
ITU G.992.3
(G.dmt.bis)
ITU G.992.4
(G.lite.bis)
ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2) that extends the capability of basic ADSL in data rates.
ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2) that extends the capability of basic ADSL in data rates.
ITU G.992.5 (ADSL2+) ITU standard (also referred to as ADSL2+) that extends the capability of basic ADSL by doubling the number of downstream bits.
ITU-T G.993.2
(VDSL2)
ITU standard that defines VDSL2.
TR-069
TR-064
DSL Forum Standard for CPE Wan Management.
DSL Forum LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration
320
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
A P P E N D I X A
Setting up Your Computer’s IP
Address
All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP/IP installed.
Windows 95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP/Vista, Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versions of UNIX/LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP/IP on your computer. Windows 3.1 requires the purchase of a third-party TCP/IP application package.
TCP/IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT/2000/XP,
Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems.
After the appropriate TCP/IP components are installed, configure the TCP/IP settings in order to "communicate" with your network.
If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment, make sure that your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the ZyXEL Device’s LAN port.
321
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Windows 95/98/Me
Click Start, Settings, Control Panel and double-click the Network icon to open the Network window.
Figure 150 WIndows 95/98/Me: Network: Configuration
Installing Components
The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components.
You need a network adapter, the TCP/IP protocol and Client for Microsoft
Networks.
If you need the adapter:
1
In the Network window, click Add.
2
Select Adapter and then click Add.
3
Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK.
If you need TCP/IP:
1
In the Network window, click Add.
2
Select Protocol and then click Add.
322
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
3
Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers.
4
Select TCP/IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK.
If you need Client for Microsoft Networks:
1
Click Add.
2
Select Client and then click Add.
3
Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers.
4
Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK.
5
Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect.
Configuring
1
In the Network window Configuration tab, select your network adapter's TCP/IP entry and click Properties
2
Click the IP Address tab.
• If your IP address is dynamic, select Obtain an IP address automatically.
• If you have a static IP address, select Specify an IP address and type your information into the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields.
Figure 151 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: IP Address
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
323
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
3
Click the DNS Configuration tab.
• If you do not know your DNS information, select Disable DNS.
• If you know your DNS information, select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields below (you may not need to fill them all in).
Figure 152 Windows 95/98/Me: TCP/IP Properties: DNS Configuration
4
Click the Gateway tab.
• If you do not know your gateway’s IP address, remove previously installed gateways.
• If you have a gateway IP address, type it in the New gateway field and click
Add.
5
Click OK to save and close the TCP/IP Properties window.
6
Click OK to close the Network window. Insert the Windows CD if prompted.
7
Turn on your ZyXEL Device and restart your computer when prompted.
Verifying Settings
1
Click Start and then Run.
2
In the Run window, type "winipcfg" and then click OK to open the IP
Configuration window.
3
Select your network adapter. You should see your computer's IP address, subnet mask and default gateway.
324
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Windows 2000/NT/XP
The following example figures use the default Windows XP GUI theme.
1
Click start (Start in Windows 2000/NT), Settings, Control Panel.
Figure 153 Windows XP: Start Menu
2
In the Control Panel, double-click Network Connections (Network and Dial-
up Connections in Windows 2000/NT).
Figure 154 Windows XP: Control Panel
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
325
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
3
Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties.
Figure 155 Windows XP: Control Panel: Network Connections: Properties
4
Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) (under the General tab in Win XP) and then click Properties.
Figure 156 Windows XP: Local Area Connection Properties
326
5
The Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window opens (the General tab in
Windows XP).
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
• If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address
automatically.
• If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields.
• Click Advanced.
Figure 157 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
6
If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK.
Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:
• In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add.
• In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in
Subnet mask, and then click Add.
• Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add.
• Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways.
• In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in
Gateway. To manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric.
• Click Add.
• Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
327
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
• Click OK when finished.
Figure 158 Windows XP: Advanced TCP/IP Properties
328
7
In the Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties window (the General tab in
Windows XP):
• Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your
DNS server IP address(es).
• If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS
server addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and
Alternate DNS server fields.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the
DNS tab to order them.
Figure 159 Windows XP: Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties
8
Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window.
9
Click Close (OK in Windows 2000/NT) to close the Local Area Connection
Properties window.
10
Close the Network Connections window (Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows 2000/NT).
11
Turn on your ZyXEL Device and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
1
Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt.
2
In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click
Status and then click the Support tab.
Windows Vista
This section shows screens from Windows Vista Enterprise Version 6.0.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
329
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
1
Click the Start icon, Control Panel.
Figure 160 Windows Vista: Start Menu
2
In the Control Panel, double-click Network and Internet.
Figure 161 Windows Vista: Control Panel
3
Click Network and Sharing Center.
Figure 162 Windows Vista: Network And Internet
330
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
4
Click Manage network connections.
Figure 163 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center
5
Right-click Local Area Connection and then click Properties.
Note: During this procedure, click Continue whenever Windows displays a screen saying that it needs your permission to continue.
Figure 164 Windows Vista: Network and Sharing Center
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
331
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
6
Select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click Properties.
Figure 165 Windows Vista: Local Area Connection Properties
332
7
The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window opens (the
General tab).
• If you have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address
automatically.
• If you have a static IP address click Use the following IP address and fill in the IP address, Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
• Click Advanced.
Figure 166 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties
8
If you do not know your gateway's IP address, remove any previously installed gateways in the IP Settings tab and click OK.
Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses:
• In the IP Settings tab, in IP addresses, click Add.
• In TCP/IP Address, type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in
Subnet mask, and then click Add.
• Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add.
• Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways.
• In TCP/IP Gateway Address, type the IP address of the default gateway in
Gateway. To manually configure a default metric (the number of transmission hops), clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric.
• Click Add.
• Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
333
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
• Click OK when finished.
Figure 167 Windows Vista: Advanced TCP/IP Properties
334
9
In the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window, (the
General tab):
• Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your
DNS server IP address(es).
• If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click Use the following DNS
server addresses, and type them in the Preferred DNS server and
Alternate DNS server fields.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
If you have previously configured DNS servers, click Advanced and then the
DNS tab to order them.
Figure 168 Windows Vista: Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties
10
Click OK to close the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window.
11
Click Close to close the Local Area Connection Properties window.
12
Close the Network Connections window.
13
Turn on your ZyXEL Device and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
1
Click Start, All Programs, Accessories and then Command Prompt.
2
In the Command Prompt window, type "ipconfig" and then press [ENTER]. You can also open Network Connections, right-click a network connection, click
Status and then click the Support tab.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
335
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Macintosh OS 8/9
1
Click the Apple menu, Control Panel and double-click TCP/IP to open the TCP/
IP Control Panel.
Figure 169 Macintosh OS 8/9: Apple Menu
336
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
2
Select Ethernet built-in from the Connect via list.
Figure 170 Macintosh OS 8/9: TCP/IP
3
For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP Server from the
Configure: list.
4
5
For statically assigned settings, do the following:
• From the Configure box, select Manually.
• Type your IP address in the IP Address box.
• Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box.
• Type the IP address of your ZyXEL Device in the Router address box.
Close the TCP/IP Control Panel.
6
Click Save if prompted, to save changes to your configuration.
7
Turn on your ZyXEL Device and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/IP properties in the TCP/IP Control Panel window.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
337
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Macintosh OS X
1
Click the Apple menu, and click System Preferences to open the System
Preferences window.
Figure 171 Macintosh OS X: Apple Menu
2
Click Network in the icon bar.
• Select Automatic from the Location list.
• Select Built-in Ethernet from the Show list.
• Click the TCP/IP tab.
3
For dynamically assigned settings, select Using DHCP from the Configure list.
Figure 172 Macintosh OS X: Network
338
4
For statically assigned settings, do the following:
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
• From the Configure box, select Manually.
• Type your IP address in the IP Address box.
• Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box.
• Type the IP address of your ZyXEL Device in the Router address box.
5
Click Apply Now and close the window.
6
Turn on your ZyXEL Device and restart your computer (if prompted).
Verifying Settings
Check your TCP/IP properties in the Network window.
Linux
This section shows you how to configure your computer’s TCP/IP settings in Red
Hat Linux 9.0. Procedure, screens and file location may vary depending on your
Linux distribution and release version.
Note: Make sure you are logged in as the root administrator.
Using the K Desktop Environment (KDE)
Follow the steps below to configure your computer IP address using the KDE.
1
Click the Red Hat button (located on the bottom left corner), select System
Setting and click Network.
Figure 173 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Devices
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
339
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
2
Double-click on the profile of the network card you wish to configure. The
Ethernet Device General screen displays as shown.
Figure 174 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Ethernet Device: General
3
• If you have a dynamic IP address, click Automatically obtain IP address
settings with and select dhcp from the drop down list.
• If you have a static IP address, click Statically set IP Addresses and fill in the Address, Subnet mask, and Default Gateway Address fields.
Click OK to save the changes and close the Ethernet Device General screen.
4
If you know your DNS server IP address(es), click the DNS tab in the Network
Configuration screen. Enter the DNS server information in the fields provided.
Figure 175 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: DNS
340
5
Click the Devices tab.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
6
Click the Activate button to apply the changes. The following screen displays.
Click Yes to save the changes in all screens.
Figure 176 Red Hat 9.0: KDE: Network Configuration: Activate
7
After the network card restart process is complete, make sure the Status is
Active in the Network Configuration screen.
Using Configuration Files
Follow the steps below to edit the network configuration files and set your computer IP address.
1
Assuming that you have only one network card on the computer, locate the ifconfig-eth0
configuration file (where eth0
is the name of the Ethernet card).
Open the configuration file with any plain text editor.
• If you have a dynamic IP address, enter dhcp following figure shows an example.
in the
BOOTPROTO=
field. The
Figure 177 Red Hat 9.0: Dynamic IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0
DEVICE=eth0
ONBOOT=yes
BOOTPROTO=dhcp
USERCTL=no
PEERDNS=yes
TYPE=Ethernet
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
341
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
• If you have a static IP address, enter
IPADDR static
in the
BOOTPROTO=
field. Type
= followed by the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) and type
NETMASK
= followed by the subnet mask. The following example shows an example where the static IP address is 192.168.1.10 and the subnet mask is
255.255.255.0.
Figure 178 Red Hat 9.0: Static IP Address Setting in ifconfig-eth0
DEVICE=eth0
ONBOOT=yes
BOOTPROTO=static
IPADDR=192.168.1.10
NETMASK=255.255.255.0
USERCTL=no
PEERDNS=yes
TYPE=Ethernet
2
If you know your DNS server IP address(es), enter the DNS server information in the resolv.conf
file in the
/etc
directory. The following figure shows an example where two DNS server IP addresses are specified.
Figure 179 Red Hat 9.0: DNS Settings in resolv.conf
nameserver 172.23.5.1
nameserver 172.23.5.2
3
After you edit and save the configuration files, you must restart the network card.
Enter
./network restart
in the
/etc/rc.d/init.d directory. The following figure shows an example.
Figure 180 Red Hat 9.0: Restart Ethernet Card
[root@localhost init.d]# network restart
Shutting down interface eth0: [OK]
Shutting down loopback interface: [OK]
Setting network parameters: [OK]
Bringing up loopback interface: [OK]
Bringing up interface eth0: [OK]
342
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
Verifying Settings
Enter ifconfig
in a terminal screen to check your TCP/IP properties.
Figure 181 Red Hat 9.0: Checking TCP/IP Properties
[root@localhost]# ifconfig eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:50:BA:72:5B:44
inet addr:172.23.19.129 Bcast:172.23.19.255 Mask:255.255.255.0
UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:717 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:13 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:100
RX bytes:730412 (713.2 Kb) TX bytes:1570 (1.5 Kb)
Interrupt:10 Base address:0x1000
[root@localhost]#
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
343
Appendix A Setting up Your Computer’s IP Address
344
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
A P P E N D I X B
IP Addresses and Subnetting
This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks.
IP addresses identify individual devices on a network. Every networking device
(including computers, servers, routers, printers, etc.) needs an IP address to communicate across the network. These networking devices are also known as hosts.
Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network.
You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub-networks.
Introduction to IP Addresses
One part of the IP address is the network number, and the other part is the host
ID. In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name, the hosts on a network share a common network number. Similarly, as each house has its own house number, each host on the network has its own unique identifying number - the host ID. Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network, while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered.
Structure
An IP address is made up of four parts, written in dotted decimal notation (for example, 192.168.1.1). Each of these four parts is known as an octet. An octet is an eight-digit binary number (for example 11000000, which is 192 in decimal notation).
Therefore, each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary, or
0 to 255 in decimal.
345
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets
(192.168.1) are the network number, and the fourth octet (16) is the host ID.
Figure 182 Network Number and Host ID
How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask.
Subnet Masks
A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number, and which bits are part of the host ID (using a logical AND operation). The term
“subnet” is short for “sub-network”.
A subnet mask has 32 bits. If a bit in the subnet mask is a “1” then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number. If a bit in the subnet mask is “0” then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host
ID.
The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number (in bold text) and host ID of an IP address (192.168.1.2 in decimal).
Table 115 Subnet Masks
IP Address (Binary)
Subnet Mask (Binary)
Network Number
Host ID
1ST
OCTET:
2ND
OCTET:
3RD
OCTET:
4TH
OCTET
(192) (168) (1) (2)
11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010
11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000
11000000 10101000 00000001
00000010
346
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
By convention, subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask, followed by a continuous sequence of zeros, for a total number of 32 bits.
Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part (the bits with a “1” value). For example, an “8-bit mask” means that the first 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes.
Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses. The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8-bit, 16-bit, 24-bit and 29-bit subnet masks.
Table 116 Subnet Masks
BINARY
1ST
OCTET
2ND
OCTET
3RD
OCTET
4TH
OCTET
DECIMAL
8-bit mask 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255.0.0.0
16-bit mask
11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255.255.0.0
11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 255.255.255.0
24-bit mask
29-bit mask
11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255.255.255.24
8
Network Size
The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network. The larger the number of network number bits, the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits.
An IP address with host IDs of all zeros is the IP address of the network
(192.168.1.0 with a 24-bit subnet mask, for example). An IP address with host
IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network (192.168.1.255 with a
24-bit subnet mask, for example).
As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts, calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows:
Table 117 Maximum Host Numbers
SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE
8 bits 255.0.0.0
16 bits 255.255.0.0
24 bits
16 bits
24 bits 255.255.255.0 8 bits
29 bits 255.255.255.2
48
3 bits
2 24 – 2
2 16 – 2
2 8 – 2
2 3 – 2
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF
HOSTS
16777214
65534
254
6
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
347
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
Notation
Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left, followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask, you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet. This is usually specified by writing a “/” followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address.
For example, 192.1.1.0 /25 is equivalent to saying 192.1.1.0 with subnet mask
255.255.255.128.
The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations.
Table 118 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation
SUBNET MASK
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.128
255.255.255.192
255.255.255.224
255.255.255.240
255.255.255.248
255.255.255.252
ALTERNATIVE
NOTATION
/24
/25
/26
/27
/28
/29
/30
LAST OCTET
(BINARY)
0000 0000
1000 0000
1100 0000
1110 0000
1111 0000
1111 1000
1111 1100
LAST OCTET
(DECIMAL)
0
128
192
224
240
248
252
Subnetting
You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub-networks. In the following example a network administrator creates two sub-networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons.
In this example, the company network address is 192.168.1.0. The first three octets of the address (192.168.1) are the network number, and the remaining octet is the host ID, allowing a maximum of 2 8 – 2 or 254 possible hosts.
348
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
The following figure shows the company network before subnetting.
Figure 183 Subnetting Example: Before Subnetting
You can “borrow” one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192.168.1.0 into two separate sub-networks. The subnet mask is now 25 bits (255.255.255.128 or
/25).
The “borrowed” host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1, allowing two subnets; 192.168.1.0 /25 and 192.168.1.128 /25.
The following figure shows the company network after subnetting. There are now two sub-networks, A and B.
Figure 184 Subnetting Example: After Subnetting
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
349
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
In a 25-bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits, so each sub-network has a maximum of
2 7 – 2 or 126 possible hosts (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet’s address itself, all ones is the subnet’s broadcast address).
192.168.1.0 with mask 255.255.255.128 is subnet A itself, and 192.168.1.127 with mask 255.255.255.128 is its broadcast address. Therefore, the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192.168.1.1 and the highest is 192.168.1.126.
Similarly, the host ID range for subnet B is 192.168.1.129 to 192.168.1.254.
Example: Four Subnets
The previous example illustrated using a 25-bit subnet mask to divide a 24-bit address into two subnets. Similarly, to divide a 24-bit address into four subnets, you need to “borrow” two host ID bits to give four possible combinations (00, 01,
10 and 11). The subnet mask is 26 bits
(11111111.11111111.11111111.11000000) or 255.255.255.192.
Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits, giving 2 6 - 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet (a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself, all ones is the subnet’s broadcast address).
Table 119 Subnet 1
IP/SUBNET MASK
IP Address (Decimal)
IP Address (Binary)
Subnet Mask (Binary)
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.0
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.63
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
192.168.1.
0
11000000.10101000.00000001. 00000000
11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.1
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.62
Table 120 Subnet 2
IP/SUBNET MASK
IP Address
IP Address (Binary)
Subnet Mask (Binary)
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.64
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.127
NETWORK NUMBER
LAST OCTET BIT
VALUE
192.168.1.
64
11000000.10101000.00000001. 01000000
11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.65
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.126
350
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
Table 121 Subnet 3
IP/SUBNET MASK
IP Address
IP Address (Binary)
Subnet Mask (Binary)
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.128
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.191
Table 122 Subnet 4
IP/SUBNET MASK
IP Address
IP Address (Binary)
Subnet Mask (Binary)
Subnet Address:
192.168.1.192
Broadcast Address:
192.168.1.255
NETWORK NUMBER
192.168.1.
LAST OCTET BIT VALUE
128
11000000.10101000.00000001. 10000000
11111111.11111111.11111111. 11000000
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.129
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.190
NETWORK NUMBER
192.168.1.
11000000.10101000.00000001.
11111111.11111111.11111111.
Lowest Host ID: 192.168.1.193
Highest Host ID: 192.168.1.254
LAST OCTET BIT VALUE
192
11000000
11000000
Example: Eight Subnets
Similarly, use a 27-bit mask to create eight subnets (000, 001, 010, 011, 100,
101, 110 and 111).
The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet.
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Table 123 Eight Subnets
SUBNET
SUBNET
ADDRESS
0
32
64
96
128
160
192
224
FIRST ADDRESS
129
161
193
225
1
33
65
97
LAST
ADDRESS
30
62
94
126
158
190
222
254
BROADCAST
ADDRESS
31
63
95
127
159
191
223
255
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
351
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
Subnet Planning
The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24-bit network number.
Table 124 24-bit Network Number Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS
5
6
7
3
4
1
2
SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS
255.255.255.128 (/25) 2
255.255.255.192 (/26) 4
255.255.255.224 (/27) 8
255.255.255.240 (/28) 16
255.255.255.248 (/29) 32
255.255.255.252 (/30) 64
255.255.255.254 (/31) 128
NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
6
2
1
126
62
30
14
The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16-bit network number.
Table 125 16-bit Network Number Subnet Planning
NO. “BORROWED”
HOST BITS
13
14
15
9
10
11
12
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
SUBNET MASK NO. SUBNETS
255.255.128.0 (/17)
255.255.192.0 (/18)
255.255.224.0 (/19)
255.255.240.0 (/20)
255.255.248.0 (/21)
255.255.252.0 (/22)
255.255.254.0 (/23)
255.255.255.0 (/24)
255.255.255.128 (/25) 512
255.255.255.192 (/26) 1024
255.255.255.224 (/27) 2048
255.255.255.240 (/28) 4096
255.255.255.248 (/29) 8192
255.255.255.252 (/30) 16384
255.255.255.254 (/31) 32768
32
64
128
256
2
4
8
16
NO. HOSTS PER
SUBNET
6
2
1
126
62
30
14
32766
16382
8190
4094
2046
1022
510
254
Configuring IP Addresses
Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP
352
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting addresses, follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask.
If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number, then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established. If this is the case, it is recommended that you select a network number from 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.0. The Internet Assigned
Number Authority (IANA) reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use; please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise. You must also enable Network Address Translation (NAT) on the ZyXEL Device.
Once you have decided on the network number, pick an IP address for your ZyXEL
Device that is easy to remember (for instance, 192.168.1.1) but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address.
The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address. Your
ZyXEL Device will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you entered. You don't need to change the subnet mask computed by the ZyXEL Device unless you are instructed to do otherwise.
Private IP Addresses
Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address. If your networks are isolated from the Internet (running only between two branch offices, for example) you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems. However, the
Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks:
• 10.0.0.0 — 10.255.255.255
• 172.16.0.0 — 172.31.255.255
• 192.168.0.0 — 192.168.255.255
You can obtain your IP address from the IANA, from an ISP, or it can be assigned from a private network. If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP, the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks. On the other hand, if you are part of a much larger organization, you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses.
Regardless of your particular situation, do not create an arbitrary IP address; always follow the guidelines above. For more information on address assignment, please refer to RFC 1597, Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466,
Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
353
Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting
354
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
A P P E N D I X C
Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
In order to use the web configurator you need to allow:
• Web browser pop-up windows from your device.
• JavaScripts (enabled by default).
• Java permissions (enabled by default).
Note: Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here. Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary.
Internet Explorer Pop-up Blockers
You may have to disable pop-up blocking to log into your device.
Either disable pop-up blocking (enabled by default in Windows XP SP (Service
Pack) 2) or allow pop-up blocking and create an exception for your device’s IP address.
Disable Pop-up Blockers
1
In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Pop-up Blocker and then select Turn Off
Pop-up Blocker.
Figure 185 Pop-up Blocker
You can also check if pop-up blocking is disabled in the Pop-up Blocker section in the Privacy tab.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
355
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
1
In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options, Privacy.
2
Clear the Block pop-ups check box in the Pop-up Blocker section of the screen.
This disables any web pop-up blockers you may have enabled.
Figure 186 Internet Options: Privacy
3
Click Apply to save this setting.
Enable Pop-up Blockers with Exceptions
Alternatively, if you only want to allow pop-up windows from your device, see the following steps.
1
In Internet Explorer, select Tools, Internet Options and then the Privacy tab.
356
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
2
Select Settings…to open the Pop-up Blocker Settings screen.
Figure 187 Internet Options: Privacy
3
Type the IP address of your device (the web page that you do not want to have blocked) with the prefix “http://”. For example, http://192.168.167.1.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
357
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
4
Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites.
Figure 188 Pop-up Blocker Settings
5
Click Close to return to the Privacy screen.
6
Click Apply to save this setting.
JavaScripts
If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer, check that JavaScripts are allowed.
358
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
1
In Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.
Figure 189 Internet Options: Security
2
Click the Custom Level... button.
3
Scroll down to Scripting.
4
Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
5
Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected (the default).
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
359
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
6
Click OK to close the window.
Figure 190 Security Settings - Java Scripting
Java Permissions
1
From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Security tab.
2
Click the Custom Level... button.
3
Scroll down to Microsoft VM.
4
Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected.
360
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
5
Click OK to close the window.
Figure 191 Security Settings - Java
JAVA (Sun)
1
From Internet Explorer, click Tools, Internet Options and then the Advanced tab.
2
Make sure that Use Java 2 for <applet> under Java (Sun) is selected.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
361
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
3
Click OK to close the window.
Figure 192 Java (Sun)
Mozilla Firefox
Mozilla Firefox 2.0 screens are used here. Screens for other versions may vary.
You can enable Java, Javascripts and pop-ups in one screen. Click Tools, then click Options in the screen that appears.
Figure 193 Mozilla Firefox: Tools > Options
362
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
Click Content.to show the screen below. Select the check boxes as shown in the following screen.
Figure 194 Mozilla Firefox Content Security
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
363
Appendix C Pop-up Windows, JavaScripts and Java Permissions
364
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
A P P E N D I X D
Wireless LANs
Wireless LAN Topologies
This section discusses ad-hoc and infrastructure wireless LAN topologies.
Ad-hoc Wireless LAN Configuration
The simplest WLAN configuration is an independent (Ad-hoc) WLAN that connects a set of computers with wireless adapters (A, B, C). Any time two or more wireless adapters are within range of each other, they can set up an independent network, which is commonly referred to as an ad-hoc network or Independent Basic Service
Set (IBSS). The following diagram shows an example of notebook computers using wireless adapters to form an ad-hoc wireless LAN.
Figure 195 Peer-to-Peer Communication in an Ad-hoc Network
BSS
A Basic Service Set (BSS) exists when all communications between wireless clients or between a wireless client and a wired network client go through one access point (AP).
Intra-BSS traffic is traffic between wireless clients in the BSS. When Intra-BSS is enabled, wireless client A and B can access the wired network and communicate
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
365
Appendix D Wireless LANs with each other. When Intra-BSS is disabled, wireless client A and B can still access the wired network but cannot communicate with each other.
Figure 196 Basic Service Set
ESS
An Extended Service Set (ESS) consists of a series of overlapping BSSs, each containing an access point, with each access point connected together by a wired network. This wired connection between APs is called a Distribution System (DS).
This type of wireless LAN topology is called an Infrastructure WLAN. The Access
Points not only provide communication with the wired network but also mediate wireless network traffic in the immediate neighborhood.
366
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
An ESSID (ESS IDentification) uniquely identifies each ESS. All access points and their associated wireless clients within the same ESS must have the same ESSID in order to communicate.
Figure 197 Infrastructure WLAN
Channel
A channel is the radio frequency(ies) used by wireless devices to transmit and receive data. Channels available depend on your geographical area. You may have a choice of channels (for your region) so you should use a channel different from an adjacent AP (access point) to reduce interference. Interference occurs when radio signals from different access points overlap causing interference and degrading performance.
Adjacent channels partially overlap however. To avoid interference due to overlap, your AP should be on a channel at least five channels away from a channel that an adjacent AP is using. For example, if your region has 11 channels and an adjacent
AP is using channel 1, then you need to select a channel between 6 or 11.
RTS/CTS
A hidden node occurs when two stations are within range of the same access point, but are not within range of each other. The following figure illustrates a
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
367
Appendix D Wireless LANs hidden node. Both stations (STA) are within range of the access point (AP) or wireless gateway, but out-of-range of each other, so they cannot "hear" each other, that is they do not know if the channel is currently being used. Therefore, they are considered hidden from each other.
Figure 198 RTS/CTS
368
When station A sends data to the AP, it might not know that the station B is already using the channel. If these two stations send data at the same time, collisions may occur when both sets of data arrive at the AP at the same time, resulting in a loss of messages for both stations.
RTS/CTS is designed to prevent collisions due to hidden nodes. An RTS/CTS defines the biggest size data frame you can send before an RTS (Request To
Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake is invoked.
When a data frame exceeds the RTS/CTS value you set (between 0 to 2432 bytes), the station that wants to transmit this frame must first send an RTS
(Request To Send) message to the AP for permission to send it. The AP then responds with a CTS (Clear to Send) message to all other stations within its range to notify them to defer their transmission. It also reserves and confirms with the requesting station the time frame for the requested transmission.
Stations can send frames smaller than the specified RTS/CTS directly to the AP without the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.
You should only configure RTS/CTS if the possibility of hidden nodes exists on your network and the "cost" of resending large frames is more than the extra network overhead involved in the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake.
If the RTS/CTS value is greater than the Fragmentation Threshold value (see next), then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach RTS/CTS size.
Note: Enabling the RTS Threshold causes redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
Fragmentation Threshold
A Fragmentation Threshold is the maximum data fragment size (between 256 and 2432 bytes) that can be sent in the wireless network before the AP will fragment the packet into smaller data frames.
A large Fragmentation Threshold is recommended for networks not prone to interference while you should set a smaller threshold for busy networks or networks that are prone to interference.
If the Fragmentation Threshold value is smaller than the RTS/CTS value (see previously) you set then the RTS (Request To Send)/CTS (Clear to Send) handshake will never occur as data frames will be fragmented before they reach
RTS/CTS size.
IEEE 802.11g Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11g is fully compatible with the IEEE 802.11b standard. This means an
IEEE 802.11b adapter can interface directly with an IEEE 802.11g access point
(and vice versa) at 11 Mbps or lower depending on range. IEEE 802.11g has several intermediate rate steps between the maximum and minimum data rates.
The IEEE 802.11g data rate and modulation are as follows:
Table 126 IEEE 802.11g
DATA RATE
(MBPS)
1
2
5.5 / 11
6/9/12/18/24/36/
48/54
MODULATION
DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift Keyed)
DQPSK (Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying)
CCK (Complementary Code Keying)
OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing)
Wireless Security Overview
Wireless security is vital to your network to protect wireless communication between wireless clients, access points and the wired network.
Wireless security methods available on the ZyXEL Device are data encryption, wireless client authentication, restricting access by device MAC address and hiding the ZyXEL Device identity.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
369
Appendix D Wireless LANs
The following figure shows the relative effectiveness of these wireless security methods available on your ZyXEL Device.
Table 127 Wireless Security Levels
SECURITY
LEVEL
Least
Secure
SECURITY TYPE
Unique SSID (Default)
Unique SSID with Hide SSID Enabled
MAC Address Filtering
WEP Encryption
IEEE802.1x EAP with RADIUS Server
Authentication
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA)
WPA2
Most Secure
Note: You must enable the same wireless security settings on the ZyXEL Device and on all wireless clients that you want to associate with it.
IEEE 802.1x
In June 2001, the IEEE 802.1x standard was designed to extend the features of
IEEE 802.11 to support extended authentication as well as providing additional accounting and control features. It is supported by Windows XP and a number of network devices. Some advantages of IEEE 802.1x are:
• User based identification that allows for roaming.
• Support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, RFC 2138,
2139) for centralized user profile and accounting management on a network
RADIUS server.
• Support for EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol, RFC 2486) that allows additional authentication methods to be deployed with no changes to the access point or the wireless clients.
RADIUS
RADIUS is based on a client-server model that supports authentication, authorization and accounting. The access point is the client and the server is the
RADIUS server. The RADIUS server handles the following tasks:
• Authentication
Determines the identity of the users.
370
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
• Authorization
Determines the network services available to authenticated users once they are connected to the network.
• Accounting
Keeps track of the client’s network activity.
RADIUS is a simple package exchange in which your AP acts as a message relay between the wireless client and the network RADIUS server.
Types of RADIUS Messages
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user authentication:
• Access-Request
Sent by an access point requesting authentication.
• Access-Reject
Sent by a RADIUS server rejecting access.
• Access-Accept
Sent by a RADIUS server allowing access.
• Access-Challenge
Sent by a RADIUS server requesting more information in order to allow access.
The access point sends a proper response from the user and then sends another
Access-Request message.
The following types of RADIUS messages are exchanged between the access point and the RADIUS server for user accounting:
• Accounting-Request
Sent by the access point requesting accounting.
• Accounting-Response
Sent by the RADIUS server to indicate that it has started or stopped accounting.
In order to ensure network security, the access point and the RADIUS server use a shared secret key, which is a password, they both know. The key is not sent over the network. In addition to the shared key, password information exchanged is also encrypted to protect the network from unauthorized access.
Types of EAP Authentication
This section discusses some popular authentication types: EAP-MD5, EAP-TLS,
EAP-TTLS, PEAP and LEAP. Your wireless LAN device may not support all authentication types.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
371
Appendix D Wireless LANs
EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is an authentication protocol that runs on top of the IEEE 802.1x transport mechanism in order to support multiple types of user authentication. By using EAP to interact with an EAP-compatible RADIUS server, an access point helps a wireless station and a RADIUS server perform authentication.
The type of authentication you use depends on the RADIUS server and an intermediary AP(s) that supports IEEE 802.1x.
For EAP-TLS authentication type, you must first have a wired connection to the network and obtain the certificate(s) from a certificate authority (CA). A certificate
(also called digital IDs) can be used to authenticate users and a CA issues certificates and guarantees the identity of each certificate owner.
EAP-MD5 (Message-Digest Algorithm 5)
MD5 authentication is the simplest one-way authentication method. The authentication server sends a challenge to the wireless client. The wireless client
‘proves’ that it knows the password by encrypting the password with the challenge and sends back the information. Password is not sent in plain text.
However, MD5 authentication has some weaknesses. Since the authentication server needs to get the plaintext passwords, the passwords must be stored. Thus someone other than the authentication server may access the password file. In addition, it is possible to impersonate an authentication server as MD5 authentication method does not perform mutual authentication. Finally, MD5 authentication method does not support data encryption with dynamic session key. You must configure WEP encryption keys for data encryption.
EAP-TLS (Transport Layer Security)
With EAP-TLS, digital certifications are needed by both the server and the wireless clients for mutual authentication. The server presents a certificate to the client.
After validating the identity of the server, the client sends a different certificate to the server. The exchange of certificates is done in the open before a secured tunnel is created. This makes user identity vulnerable to passive attacks. A digital certificate is an electronic ID card that authenticates the sender’s identity.
However, to implement EAP-TLS, you need a Certificate Authority (CA) to handle certificates, which imposes a management overhead.
EAP-TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Service)
EAP-TTLS is an extension of the EAP-TLS authentication that uses certificates for only the server-side authentications to establish a secure connection. Client authentication is then done by sending username and password through the secure connection, thus client identity is protected. For client authentication, EAP-
372
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
PEAP (Protected EAP)
Like EAP-TTLS, server-side certificate authentication is used to establish a secure connection, then use simple username and password methods through the secured connection to authenticate the clients, thus hiding client identity.
However, PEAP only supports EAP methods, such as EAP-MD5, EAP-MSCHAPv2 and EAP-GTC (EAP-Generic Token Card), for client authentication. EAP-GTC is implemented only by Cisco.
LEAP
TTLS supports EAP methods and legacy authentication methods such as PAP,
CHAP, MS-CHAP and MS-CHAP v2.
LEAP (Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol) is a Cisco implementation of
IEEE 802.1x.
Dynamic WEP Key Exchange
The AP maps a unique key that is generated with the RADIUS server. This key expires when the wireless connection times out, disconnects or reauthentication times out. A new WEP key is generated each time reauthentication is performed.
If this feature is enabled, it is not necessary to configure a default encryption key in the wireless security configuration screen. You may still configure and store keys, but they will not be used while dynamic WEP is enabled.
Note: EAP-MD5 cannot be used with Dynamic WEP Key Exchange
For added security, certificate-based authentications (EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS and
PEAP) use dynamic keys for data encryption. They are often deployed in corporate environments, but for public deployment, a simple user name and password pair is more practical. The following table is a comparison of the features of authentication types.
Table 128 Comparison of EAP Authentication Types
Mutual Authentication
Certificate – Client
Certificate – Server
EAP-MD5
No
No
No
Dynamic Key Exchange No
Credential Integrity
Deployment Difficulty
Client Identity
Protection
None
Easy
No
EAP-TLS EAP-TTLS PEAP
Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Strong
Hard
No
Optional
Yes
Yes
Strong
Moderate
Yes
LEAP
Yes
Optional No
Yes No
Yes
Strong
Yes
Moderate
Moderate Moderate
Yes No
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
373
Appendix D Wireless LANs
WPA and WPA2
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a subset of the IEEE 802.11i standard. WPA2
(IEEE 802.11i) is a wireless security standard that defines stronger encryption, authentication and key management than WPA.
Key differences between WPA or WPA2 and WEP are improved data encryption and user authentication.
If both an AP and the wireless clients support WPA2 and you have an external
RADIUS server, use WPA2 for stronger data encryption. If you don't have an external RADIUS server, you should use WPA2-PSK (WPA2-Pre-Shared Key) that only requires a single (identical) password entered into each access point, wireless gateway and wireless client. As long as the passwords match, a wireless client will be granted access to a WLAN.
If the AP or the wireless clients do not support WPA2, just use WPA or WPA-PSK depending on whether you have an external RADIUS server or not.
Select WEP only when the AP and/or wireless clients do not support WPA or WPA2.
WEP is less secure than WPA or WPA2.
Encryption
WPA improves data encryption by using Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP),
Message Integrity Check (MIC) and IEEE 802.1x. WPA2 also uses TKIP when required for compatibility reasons, but offers stronger encryption than TKIP with
Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) in the Counter mode with Cipher block chaining Message authentication code Protocol (CCMP).
TKIP uses 128-bit keys that are dynamically generated and distributed by the authentication server. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is a block cipher that uses a 256-bit mathematical algorithm called Rijndael. They both include a perpacket key mixing function, a Message Integrity Check (MIC) named Michael, an extended initialization vector (IV) with sequencing rules, and a re-keying mechanism.
WPA and WPA2 regularly change and rotate the encryption keys so that the same encryption key is never used twice.
The RADIUS server distributes a Pairwise Master Key (PMK) key to the AP that then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients. This all happens in the background automatically.
374
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
The Message Integrity Check (MIC) is designed to prevent an attacker from capturing data packets, altering them and resending them. The MIC provides a strong mathematical function in which the receiver and the transmitter each compute and then compare the MIC. If they do not match, it is assumed that the data has been tampered with and the packet is dropped.
By generating unique data encryption keys for every data packet and by creating an integrity checking mechanism (MIC), with TKIP and AES it is more difficult to decrypt data on a Wi-Fi network than WEP and difficult for an intruder to break into the network.
The encryption mechanisms used for WPA(2) and WPA(2)-PSK are the same. The only difference between the two is that WPA(2)-PSK uses a simple common password, instead of user-specific credentials. The common-password approach makes WPA(2)-PSK susceptible to brute-force password-guessing attacks but it’s still an improvement over WEP as it employs a consistent, single, alphanumeric password to derive a PMK which is used to generate unique temporal encryption keys. This prevent all wireless devices sharing the same encryption keys. (a weakness of WEP)
User Authentication
WPA and WPA2 apply IEEE 802.1x and Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) to authenticate wireless clients using an external RADIUS database. WPA2 reduces the number of key exchange messages from six to four (CCMP 4-way handshake) and shortens the time required to connect to a network. Other WPA2 authentication features that are different from WPA include key caching and preauthentication. These two features are optional and may not be supported in all wireless devices.
Key caching allows a wireless client to store the PMK it derived through a successful authentication with an AP. The wireless client uses the PMK when it tries to connect to the same AP and does not need to go with the authentication process again.
Pre-authentication enables fast roaming by allowing the wireless client (already connecting to an AP) to perform IEEE 802.1x authentication with another AP before connecting to it.
Wireless Client WPA Supplicants
A wireless client supplicant is the software that runs on an operating system instructing the wireless client how to use WPA. At the time of writing, the most widely available supplicant is the WPA patch for Windows XP, Funk Software's
Odyssey client.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
375
Appendix D Wireless LANs
The Windows XP patch is a free download that adds WPA capability to Windows
XP's built-in "Zero Configuration" wireless client. However, you must run Windows
XP to use it.
WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example
To set up WPA(2), you need the IP address of the RADIUS server, its port number
(default is 1812), and the RADIUS shared secret. A WPA(2) application example with an external RADIUS server looks as follows. "A" is the RADIUS server. "DS" is the distribution system.
1
The AP passes the wireless client's authentication request to the RADIUS server.
2
The RADIUS server then checks the user's identification against its database and grants or denies network access accordingly.
3
A 256-bit Pairwise Master Key (PMK) is derived from the authentication process by the RADIUS server and the client.
4
The RADIUS server distributes the PMK to the AP. The AP then sets up a key hierarchy and management system, using the PMK to dynamically generate unique data encryption keys. The keys are used to encrypt every data packet that is wirelessly communicated between the AP and the wireless clients.
Figure 199 WPA(2) with RADIUS Application Example
WPA(2)-PSK Application Example
A WPA(2)-PSK application looks as follows.
1
First enter identical passwords into the AP and all wireless clients. The Pre-Shared
Key (PSK) must consist of between 8 and 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters (including spaces and symbols).
376
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
2
The AP checks each wireless client's password and allows it to join the network only if the password matches.
3
The AP and wireless clients generate a common PMK (Pairwise Master Key). The key itself is not sent over the network, but is derived from the PSK and the SSID.
4
The AP and wireless clients use the TKIP or AES encryption process, the PMK and information exchanged in a handshake to create temporal encryption keys. They use these keys to encrypt data exchanged between them.
Figure 200 WPA(2)-PSK Authentication
Security Parameters Summary
Refer to this table to see what other security parameters you should configure for each authentication method or key management protocol type. MAC address filters are not dependent on how you configure these security features.
Table 129 Wireless Security Relational Matrix
AUTHENTICATION
METHOD/ KEY
MANAGEMENT
PROTOCOL
Open
ENCRYPTIO
N METHOD
None
ENTER
MANUAL KEY
No
Open
Shared
WPA
WPA-PSK
WEP
WEP
TKIP/AES
TKIP/AES
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
IEEE 802.1X
Disable
Enable without Dynamic WEP
Key
Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
Enable without Dynamic WEP
Key
Disable
Enable with Dynamic WEP Key
Enable without Dynamic WEP
Key
Disable
Enable
Disable
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
377
Appendix D Wireless LANs
Table 129 Wireless Security Relational Matrix (continued)
AUTHENTICATION
METHOD/ KEY
MANAGEMENT
PROTOCOL
WPA2
WPA2-PSK
ENCRYPTIO
N METHOD
TKIP/AES
TKIP/AES
ENTER
MANUAL KEY
No
Yes
IEEE 802.1X
Enable
Disable
Antenna Overview
An antenna couples RF signals onto air. A transmitter within a wireless device sends an RF signal to the antenna, which propagates the signal through the air.
The antenna also operates in reverse by capturing RF signals from the air.
Positioning the antennas properly increases the range and coverage area of a wireless LAN.
Antenna Characteristics
Frequency
An antenna in the frequency of 2.4GHz (IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g) or 5GHz
(IEEE 802.11a) is needed to communicate efficiently in a wireless LAN
Radiation Pattern
A radiation pattern is a diagram that allows you to visualize the shape of the antenna’s coverage area.
Antenna Gain
Antenna gain, measured in dB (decibel), is the increase in coverage within the RF beam width. Higher antenna gain improves the range of the signal for better communications.
For an indoor site, each 1 dB increase in antenna gain results in a range increase of approximately 2.5%. For an unobstructed outdoor site, each 1dB increase in gain results in a range increase of approximately 5%. Actual results may vary depending on the network environment.
Antenna gain is sometimes specified in dBi, which is how much the antenna increases the signal power compared to using an isotropic antenna. An isotropic antenna is a theoretical perfect antenna that sends out radio signals equally well in all directions. dBi represents the true gain that the antenna provides.
378
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix D Wireless LANs
Types of Antennas for WLAN
There are two types of antennas used for wireless LAN applications.
• Omni-directional antennas send the RF signal out in all directions on a horizontal plane. The coverage area is torus-shaped (like a donut) which makes these antennas ideal for a room environment. With a wide coverage area, it is possible to make circular overlapping coverage areas with multiple access points.
• Directional antennas concentrate the RF signal in a beam, like a flashlight does with the light from its bulb. The angle of the beam determines the width of the coverage pattern. Angles typically range from 20 degrees (very directional) to
120 degrees (less directional). Directional antennas are ideal for hallways and outdoor point-to-point applications.
Positioning Antennas
In general, antennas should be mounted as high as practically possible and free of obstructions. In point-to–point application, position both antennas at the same height and in a direct line of sight to each other to attain the best performance.
For omni-directional antennas mounted on a table, desk, and so on, point the antenna up. For omni-directional antennas mounted on a wall or ceiling, point the antenna down. For a single AP application, place omni-directional antennas as close to the center of the coverage area as possible.
For directional antennas, point the antenna in the direction of the desired coverage area.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
379
Appendix D Wireless LANs
380
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
A P P E N D I X E
Services
The following table lists some commonly-used services and their associated protocols and port numbers.
• Name: This is a short, descriptive name for the service. You can use this one or create a different one, if you like.
• Protocol: This is the type of IP protocol used by the service. If this is TCP/
UDP, then the service uses the same port number with TCP and UDP. If this is
USER-DEFINED, the Port(s) is the IP protocol number, not the port number.
• Port(s): This value depends on the Protocol.
• If the Protocol is TCP, UDP, or TCP/UDP, this is the IP port number.
• If the Protocol is USER, this is the IP protocol number.
• Description: This is a brief explanation of the applications that use this service or the situations in which this service is used.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
381
Appendix E Services
Table 130 Examples of Services
NAME
AH
(IPSEC_TUNNEL)
AIM
AUTH
PROTOCOL
User-Defined
TCP
TCP
BGP
BOOTP_CLIENT
BOOTP_SERVER
CU-SEEME
DNS
TCP
UDP
UDP
TCP/UDP
TCP/UDP
TCP/UDP
ESP
(IPSEC_TUNNEL)
User-Defined
FINGER TCP
FTP
H.323
HTTP
HTTPS
ICMP
ICQ
IGMP
(MULTICAST)
IKE
IMAP4
IMAP4S
IRC
TCP
TCP
TCP
TCP
TCP
User-Defined
UDP
User-Defined
UDP
TCP
TCP
TCP/UDP
PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
51
5190
113
179
68
67
7648
24032
53
The IPSEC AH (Authentication Header) tunneling protocol uses this service.
AOL’s Internet Messenger service.
Authentication protocol used by some servers.
Border Gateway Protocol.
DHCP Client.
DHCP Server.
A popular videoconferencing solution from White Pines Software.
50
79
20
21
1720
80
443
1
4000
2
500
143
993
6667
Domain Name Server, a service that matches web names (for instance www.zyxel.com
) to IP numbers.
The IPSEC ESP (Encapsulation
Security Protocol) tunneling protocol uses this service.
Finger is a UNIX or Internet related command that can be used to find out if a user is logged on.
File Transfer Protocol, a program to enable fast transfer of files, including large files that may not be possible by e-mail.
NetMeeting uses this protocol.
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol - a client/ server protocol for the world wide web.
HTTPS is a secured http session often used in e-commerce.
Internet Control Message Protocol is often used for diagnostic purposes.
This is a popular Internet chat program.
Internet Group Multicast Protocol is used when sending packets to a specific group of hosts.
The Internet Key Exchange algorithm is used for key distribution and management.
The Internet Message Access Protocol is used for e-mail.
This is a more secure version of IMAP4 that runs over SSL.
This is another popular Internet chat program.
382
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix E Services
Table 130 Examples of Services (continued)
NAME
MSN Messenger
NetBIOS
NEW-ICQ
NEWS
NFS
NNTP
PING
POP3
POP3S
PPTP
PPTP_TUNNEL
(GRE)
RCMD
REAL_AUDIO
REXEC
RLOGIN
ROADRUNNER
RTELNET
RTSP
PROTOCOL
TCP
TCP/UDP
TCP/UDP
TCP/UDP
TCP/UDP
TCP
TCP
UDP
TCP
User-Defined
TCP
TCP
TCP
User-Defined
TCP
TCP
TCP
TCP
TCP/UDP
TCP
TCP/UDP
PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
1863
137
138
Microsoft Networks’ messenger service uses this protocol.
The Network Basic Input/Output
System is used for communication between computers in a LAN.
139
445
5190
144
2049
119
1
110
995
1723
47
512
7070
514
513
1026
107
554
An Internet chat program.
A protocol for news groups.
Network File System - NFS is a client/ server distributed file service that provides transparent file sharing for network environments.
Network News Transport Protocol is the delivery mechanism for the
USENET newsgroup service.
Packet INternet Groper is a protocol that sends out ICMP echo requests to test whether or not a remote host is reachable.
Post Office Protocol version 3 lets a client computer get e-mail from a
POP3 server through a temporary connection (TCP/IP or other).
This is a more secure version of POP3 that runs over SSL.
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the control channel.
PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling
Protocol) enables secure transfer of data over public networks. This is the data channel.
Remote Command Service.
A streaming audio service that enables real time sound over the web.
Remote Execution Daemon.
Remote Login.
This is an ISP that provides services mainly for cable modems.
Remote Telnet.
The Real Time Streaming (media control) Protocol (RTSP) is a remote control for multimedia on the
Internet.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
383
Appendix E Services
Table 130 Examples of Services (continued)
NAME
SFTP
SMTP
SMTPS
SNMP
SNMP-TRAPS
SQL-NET
SSDP
SSH
STRM WORKS
SYSLOG
TACACS
TELNET
VDOLIVE
PROTOCOL
TCP
TCP
TCP
TCP/UDP
TCP/UDP
TCP
UDP
TCP/UDP
UDP
UDP
UDP
TCP
TCP
UDP
PORT(S) DESCRIPTION
115
25
465
161
162
1521
1900
22
1558
514
49
23
7000 userdefined
The Simple File Transfer Protocol is an old way of transferring files between computers.
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is the message-exchange standard for the
Internet. SMTP enables you to move messages from one e-mail server to another.
This is a more secure version of SMTP that runs over SSL.
Simple Network Management
Program.
Traps for use with the SNMP
(RFC:1215).
Structured Query Language is an interface to access data on many different types of database systems, including mainframes, midrange systems, UNIX systems and network servers.
The Simple Service Discovery Protocol supports Universal Plug-and-Play
(UPnP).
Secure Shell Remote Login Program.
Stream Works Protocol.
Syslog allows you to send system logs to a UNIX server.
Login Host Protocol used for (Terminal
Access Controller Access Control
System).
Telnet is the login and terminal emulation protocol common on the
Internet and in UNIX environments. It operates over TCP/IP networks. Its primary function is to allow users to log into remote host systems.
A videoconferencing solution. The UDP port number is specified in the application.
384
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
A P P E N D I X F
Open Software Announcements
End-User License Agreement for “VSG1432-B101”
WARNING: ZyXEL Communications Corp. IS WILLING TO LICENSE THE
SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY UPON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE
TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THE TERMS
CAREFULLY BEFORE COMPLETING THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AS INSTALLING
THE SOFTWARE WILL INDICATE YOUR ASSENT TO THEM. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE
TO THESE TERMS, THEN ZyXEL IS UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO
YOU, IN WHICH EVENT YOU SHOULD RETURN THE UNINSTALLED SOFTWARE AND
PACKAGING TO THE PLACE FROM WHICH IT WAS ACQUIRED OR ZyXEL, AND
YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED. HOWEVER, CERTAIN ZYXEL’S PRODUCTS MAY
CONTAIN–IN PART-SOME THIRD PARTY’S FREE AND OPEN SOFTWARE PROGRAMS
WHICH ALLOW YOU TO FREELY COPY, RUN, DISTRIBUTE, MODIFY AND IMPROVE
THE SOFTWARE UNDER THE APPLICABLE TERMS OF SUCH THRID PARTY’S
LICENSES (“OPEN-SOURCED COMPONENTS”). THE OPEN-SOURCED
COMPONENTS ARE LISTED IN THE NOTICE OR APPENDIX BELOW. ZYXEL MAY
HAVE DISTRIBUTED TO YOU HARDWARE AND/OR SOFTWARE, OR MADE
AVAILABLE FOR ELECTRONIC DOWNLOADS THESE FREE SOFTWARE PROGRAMS
OF THRID PARTIES AND YOU ARE LICENSED TO FREELY COPY, MODIFY AND
REDISTIBUTE THAT SOFTWARE UNDER THE APPLICABLE LICENSE TERMS OF
SUCH THIRD PARTY. NONE OF THE STATEMENTS OR DOCUMENTATION FROM
ZYXEL INCLUDING ANY RESTRICTIONS OR CONDITIONS STATED IN THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT SHALL RESTRICT ANY RIGHTS AND LICENSES YOU
MAY HAVE WITH RESPECT TO THE OPEN-SOURCED COMPONENTS UNDER THE
APPLICABLE LICENSE TERMS OF SUCH THIRD PARTY.
1.Grant of License for Personal Use
ZyXEL Communications Corp. ("ZyXEL") grants you a non-exclusive, nonsublicense, non-transferable license to use the program with which this license is distributed (the "Software"), including any documentation files accompanying the
Software ("Documentation"), for internal business use only, for up to the number of users specified in sales order and invoice. You have the right to make one
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
385
Appendix F Open Software Announcements backup copy of the Software and Documentation solely for archival, back-up or disaster recovery purposes. You shall not exceed the scope of the license granted hereunder. Any rights not expressly granted by ZyXEL to you are reserved by
ZyXEL, and all implied licenses are disclaimed.
2.Ownership
You have no ownership rights in the Software. Rather, you have a license to use the Software as long as this License Agreement remains in full force and effect.
Ownership of the Software, Documentation and all intellectual property rights therein shall remain at all times with ZyXEL. Any other use of the Software by any other entity is strictly forbidden and is a violation of this License Agreement.
3.Copyright
The Software and Documentation contain material that is protected by international copyright law, trade secret law, international treaty provisions, and the applicable national laws of each respective country. All rights not granted to you herein are expressly reserved by ZyXEL. You may not remove any proprietary notice of ZyXEL or any of its licensors from any copy of the Software or
Documentation.
4.Restrictions
You may not publish, display, disclose, sell, rent, lease, modify, store, loan, distribute, or create derivative works of the Software, or any part thereof. You may not assign, sublicense, convey or otherwise transfer, pledge as security or otherwise encumber the rights and licenses granted hereunder with respect to the
Software. ZyXEL is not obligated to provide any maintenance, technical or other support for the resultant modified Software. You may not copy, reverse engineer, decompile, reverse compile, translate, adapt, or disassemble the Software, or any part thereof, nor shall you attempt to create the source code from the object code for the Software. Except as and only to the extent expressly permitted in this
License, you may not market, co-brand, and private label or otherwise permit third parties to link to the Software, or any part thereof. You may not use the
Software, or any part thereof, in the operation of a service bureau or for the benefit of any other person or entity. You may not cause, assist or permit any third party to do any of the foregoing. Portions of the Software utilize or include third party software and other copyright material. Acknowledgements, licensing terms and disclaimers for such material are contained in the License Notice as below for the third party software, and your use of such material is exclusively governed by their respective terms. ZyXEL has provided, as part of the Software package, access to certain third party software as a convenience. To the extent that the Software contains third party software, ZyXEL has no express or implied obligation to provide any technical or other support for such software other than compliance with the applicable license terms of such third party, and makes no warranty (express, implied or statutory) whatsoever with respect thereto. Please
386
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix F Open Software Announcements contact the appropriate software vendor or manufacturer directly for technical support and customer service related to its software and products.
5.Confidentiality
You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of ZyXEL and you hereby agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as great a degree of care as you use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most confidential information. You agree to reasonably communicate the terms and conditions of this License Agreement to those persons employed by you who come into contact with the Software, and to use reasonable best efforts to ensure their compliance with such terms and conditions, including, without limitation, not knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the Software for the purpose of deriving the source code of the Software.
6.No Warranty
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS." TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY
LAW, ZyXEL DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-
INFRINGEMENT. ZyXEL DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED
IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET ANY REQUIREMENTS OR NEEDS YOU MAY HAVE,
OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE ERROR FREE, OR IN AN UNINTERUPTED
FASHION, OR THAT ANY DEFECTS OR ERRORS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE
CORRECTED, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE IS COMPATIBLE WITH ANY PARTICULAR
PLATFORM. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE WAIVER OR EXCLUSION
OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES SO THEY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IF THIS EXCLUSION
IS HELD TO BE UNENFORCEABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION,
THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION
TO A PERIOD OF THIRTY (30) DAYS FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE OF THE
SOFTWARE, AND NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD.
7.Limitation of Liability
IN NO EVENT WILL ZyXEL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF
BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF BUSINESS
INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
SOFTWARE OR PROGRAM, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY, EVEN IF
ZyXEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. ZyXEL's
TOTAL AGGREGATE LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS
AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND
DOCUMENTATION OR OTHERWISE SHALL BE EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE,
BUT SHALL IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE PRODUCT’S PRICE. BECAUSE SOME
STATES/COUNTRIES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
387
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE
LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
8.Export Restrictions
THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT IS EXPRESSLY MADE SUBJECT TO ANY APPLICABLE
LAWS, REGULATIONS, ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS ON THE EXPORT OF
THE SOFTWARE OR INFORMATION ABOUT SUCH SOFTWARE WHICH MAY BE
IMPOSED FROM TIME TO TIME. YOU SHALL NOT EXPORT THE SOFTWARE,
DOCUMENTATION OR INFORMATION ABOUT THE SOFTWARE AND
DOCUMENTATION WITHOUT COMPLYING WITH SUCH LAWS, REGULATIONS,
ORDERS, OR OTHER RESTRICTIONS. YOU AGREE TO INDEMNIFY ZyXEL AGAINST
ALL CLAIMS, LOSSES, DAMAGES, LIABILITIES, COSTS AND EXPENSES,
INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEYS' FEES, TO THE EXTENT SUCH CLAIMS
ARISE OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS SECTION 8.
9.Audit Rights
ZyXEL SHALL HAVE THE RIGHT, AT ITS OWN EXPENSE, UPON REASONABLE PRIOR
NOTICE, TO PERIODICALLY INSPECT AND AUDIT YOUR RECORDS TO ENSURE
YOUR COMPLIANCE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE
AGREEMENT.
10.Termination
This License Agreement is effective until it is terminated. You may terminate this
License Agreement at any time by destroying or returning to ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation in your possession or under your control. ZyXEL may terminate this License Agreement for any reason, including, but not limited to, if ZyXEL finds that you have violated any of the terms of this License
Agreement. Upon notification of termination, you agree to destroy or return to
ZyXEL all copies of the Software and Documentation and to certify in writing that all known copies, including backup copies, have been destroyed. All provisions relating to confidentiality, proprietary rights, and non-disclosure shall survive the termination of this Software License Agreement.
11.General
This License Agreement shall be construed, interpreted and governed by the laws of Republic of China without regard to conflicts of laws provisions thereof. The exclusive forum for any disputes arising out of or relating to this License
Agreement shall be an appropriate court or Commercial Arbitration Association sitting in ROC, Taiwan if the parties agree to a binding arbitration. This License
Agreement shall constitute the entire Agreement between the parties hereto. This
License Agreement, the rights granted hereunder, the Software and
Documentation shall not be assigned by you without the prior written consent of
ZyXEL. Any waiver or modification of this License Agreement shall only be
388
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix F Open Software Announcements effective if it is in writing and signed by both parties hereto. If any part of this
License Agreement is found invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the remainder of this License Agreement shall be interpreted so as to reasonably effect the intention of the parties.
NOTE: Some components of this product incorporate free software programs covered under the open source code licenses which allows you to freely copy, modify and redistribute the software. For at least three (3) years from the date of distribution of the applicable product or software, we will give to anyone who contacts us at the ZyXEL Technical Support ([email protected]), for a charge of no more than our cost of physically performing source code distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the complete corresponding source code for the version of the Programs that we distributed to you if we are in possession of such.
Notice
Information herein is subject to change without notice. Companies, names, and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted. No part may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, except the express written permission of ZyXEL
Communications Corporation.
This Product includes MIPS Linux kernel , Bridge-Utils, BusyBox 1.0.0 toolset ,
Dproxy, ebtables, bftpd, iproute2, iptables, udhcp and zebra software under GPL
2.0 license.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
389
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the
Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our
General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
390
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this
General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
391
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the
Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section
2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code.
(This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components
(compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
392
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.
However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this
License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this
License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
393
Appendix F Open Software Announcements places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the
General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the
Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.
Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/
OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR
CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY
MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING
RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR
A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN
IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
394
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
All other trademarks or trade names mentioned herein, if any, are the property of their respective owners.
This Product includes ppp software under below license
This directory contains source code and precompiled binaries for ppp-2.4, a package which implements the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) to provide Internet connections over serial lines. ppp-2.4 currently supports Linux and Solaris.
All of the code here can be freely used and redistributed. Theindividual source files each have their own copyright and permission notice; some have a BSD-style notice and some are under the GPL.
This Product includes Ssh server: dropbear software under MIT-style license
The MIT License
Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders>
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY,
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
395
Appendix F Open Software Announcements
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.
This Product includes openssl: openSSL library software under BSD-style license
396
Copyright (c) <YEAR>, <OWNER>
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of the <ORGANIZATION> nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
A P P E N D I X G
Legal Information
Copyright
Copyright © 2010 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, translated into any language, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, photocopying, manual, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation.
Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products, or software described herein. Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others. ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice. This publication is subject to change without notice.
Trademarks
ZyNOS (ZyXEL Network Operating System) is a registered trademark of ZyXEL
Communications, Inc. Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners.
Certifications
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Interference Statement
The device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
397
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix G Legal Information
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operations.
This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this device does cause harmful interference to radio/television reception, which can be determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
1
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
2
Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
3
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
4
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
398
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement
• This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
• IEEE 802.11b or 802.11g operation of this product in the U.S.A. is firmwarelimited to channels 1 through 11.
• To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons.
注意 !
依據 低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
第十二條 經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司、商號或使用
者均不得擅自變更頻率、加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能。
第十四條 低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現
有干擾現象時，應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。
前項合法通信，指依電信規定作業之無線電信。低功率射頻電機須忍
受合法通信或工業、科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Appendix G Legal Information
本機限在不干擾合法電臺與不受被干擾保障條件下於室內使用。
減少電磁波影響，請妥適使用。
Notices
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device has been designed for the WLAN 2.4 GHz network throughout the EC region and Switzerland, with restrictions in France.
Ce produit est conçu pour les bandes de fréquences 2,4 GHz et/ou 5 GHz conformément à la législation Européenne. En France métropolitaine, suivant les décisions n°03-908 et 03-909 de l’ARCEP, la puissance d’émission ne devra pas dépasser 10 mW (10 dB) dans le cadre d’une installation WiFi en extérieur pour les fréquences comprises entre 2454 MHz et 2483,5 MHz.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
Viewing Certifications
1
Go to http://www.zyxel.com
.
2
Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product's page.
3
Select the certification you wish to view from this page.
ZyXEL Limited Warranty
ZyXEL warrants to the original end user (purchaser) that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, ZyXEL will, at its discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor, and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value, and will be solely at the discretion of
ZyXEL. This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions.
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
399
Appendix G Legal Information
Note
Repair or replacement, as provided under this warranty, is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied, including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose. ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser.
To obtain the services of this warranty, contact ZyXEL's Service Center for your
Return Material Authorization number (RMA). Products must be returned Postage
Prepaid. It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped. Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out-dated warranty will be repaired or replaced (at the discretion of ZyXEL) and the customer will be billed for parts and labor. All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address, Postage Paid. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country.
Registration
Register your product online to receive e-mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www.zyxel.com for global products, or at www.us.zyxel.com for
North American products.
400
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
A
ACL rule
ACS
activation firewalls
SIP ALG
SSID
Address Resolution Protocol
administrator password
ADSL compliance
dual latency
EOC
multi-mode
TPS-TC
vendor ID
AH
algorithms
alternative subnet mask notation
antenna
directional
gain
omni-directional
AP (access point)
applications
Internet access
applications, NAT
ARP Table
ATM
QoS
authentication
RADIUS server
Auto Configuration Server, see ACS
B backup configuration
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Index
Index
Basic Service Set, See BSS
blinking LEDs
broadcast
BSS
example
C
CA
Canonical Format Indicator See CFI
CBR
certificate details
factory default
Certificate Authority
certificates
authentication
creating
importing
public key
replacing
storage space
Certification Authority
Certification Authority. see CA
certifications
notices
viewing
CFI
channel
interference
channel, wireless LAN
client list
compatibility, WDS
compliance
configuration backup
401
Index firewalls
reset
restoring
static route
copyright
CoS
CoS technologies
creating certificates
CTS (Clear to Send)
CTS threshold
D data fragment threshold
DDoS
default server address
DH
DHCP
DHCP relay
DHCP server
diagnostic
Differentiated Services, see DiffServ
Diffie-Hellman key groups
DiffServ
marking rule
digital IDs
disclaimer
DMZ
DNS
Domain Name
DoS
DS field
DS, dee differentiated services
DSCP
dynamic DNS
wildcard
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, see DHCP
dynamic WEP key exchange
DYNDNS wildcard
E
EAP Authentication
ECHO
e-mail log example
encapsulation
PPPoA
PPPoE
encryption
ESP
ESS
Extended Service Set IDentification
Extended Service Set, See ESS
F
FCC interference statement
file sharing
filters
MAC address
Finger
firewalls
add protocols
configuration
DDoS
DoS
LAND attack
Ping of Death
SYN attack
firmware
version
forwarding ports
fragmentation threshold
FTP
G
General wireless LAN screen
402
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
Index
H hidden node
HTTP
humidity
I
IANA
Internet Assigned Numbers Authority
IBSS
ID type and content
IEEE 802.11g
IEEE 802.1Q
IGA
IGMP
Access Control List
ACL
filter
multicast group list
router alert option
statistics
IGMP proxy
IGMP snooping
IGMP v1
IGMP v2
IKE phases
ILA
importing certificates
Independent Basic Service Set
See IBSS
initialization vector (IV)
Inside Global Address, see IGA
inside header
interface group
Internet wizard setup
Internet access
wizard setup
Internet Group Multicast Protocol, see IGMP
Internet Key Exchange
Internet Protocol Security, see IPSec
IP address
ping
private
IP alias
NAT applications
IP multicasting
IP Sec
IPSec
algorithms
architecture
NAT
L
LAN
client list
DHCP
DNS
IP address
MAC address
status
subnet mask
LAND attack
LAN-Side DSL CPE Configuration
limitations wireless LAN
WPS
login
passwords
logs
M
MAC address
filter
MAC authentication
Mac filter
managing the device good habits
MBS
MBSSID
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
403
Index
MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit)
multicast
IGMP
multiplexing
LLC-based
VC-based
N
NAT
applications
IP alias
example
global
IGA
ILA
inside
IPSec
local
outside
port forwarding
port number
services
SIP ALG
activation
traversal
NAT example
negotiation mode
Network Address Translation
Network Address Translation, see NAT
Network Map
network map
NNTP
O operation humidity
operation temperature
outside header
404
P
Pairwise Master Key (PMK)
passwords
PBC
PCR
Per-Hop Behavior, see PHB
PHB
PIN, WPS
example
Ping of Death
Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol
POP3
port forwarding
ports
power adaptor
power specifications
PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) Link Layer
Protocol
PPPoA
PPPoE
PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet)
PPTP
preamble
preamble mode
pre-shared key
private IP address
product registration
PSK
push button
Push Button Configuration, see PBC
push button, WPS
Q
QoS
marking
setup
tagging
versus CoS
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
R
RADIUS
message types
messages
shared secret key
RADIUS server
registration product
related documentation
remote management
TR-069
Remote Procedure Calls, see RPCs
reset
restart
restoring configuration
RFC 2516
RFC 3164
router alert option
router features
RPPCs
RTS (Request To Send)
threshold
RTS threshold
S safety warnings
SCR
secure gateway address
security wireless LAN
security associations, see VPN
Security Log
Security Parameter Index
Security Parameter Index, see SPI
service access control
Service Set
Services
setup
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide firewalls
static route
shaping traffic
Single Rate Three Color Marker, see srTCM
SIP ALG
activation
SMTP
SNMP
SNMP trap
SPI
srTCM
SSID
activation
MBSSID
static route
configuration
example
status
firmware version
LAN
WAN
wireless LAN
status indicators
storage humidity
storage temperature
subnet
subnet mask
subnetting
SYN attack
syntax conventions
syslog protocol
severity levels
system firmware
version
passwords
reset
status
LAN
WAN
wireless LAN
time
Index
405
Index
T
Tag Control Information See TCI
Tag Protocol Identifier See TPID
temperature
thresholds data fragment
RTS/CTS
time
TPID
TR-064
TR-069
ACS setup
authentication
trademarks
traffic shaping
example
transparent bridging
transport mode
trTCM
tunnel mode
Two Rate Three Color Marker, see trTCM
U
UBR
unicast
Universal Plug and Play, see UPnP
upgrading firmware
UPnP
cautions
example
installation
NAT traversal
USB features
V
VBR
VBR-nRT
VBR-RT
406
VCI
VDSL
band plans
HDLC
INP
MCM
profiles
SNR
SNRM
SRA
tone spacing
TPS-TC
US0 types
Virtual Local Area Network See VLAN
Virtual Private Network, see VPN
VLAN
Introduction
number of possible VIDs priority frame static
VLAN ID
VLAN tag
VPI
VPN
established in two phases
IPSec
security associations (SA)
W
WAN
ATM QoS
encapsulation
IGMP
IP address
multicast
multiplexing
status
traffic shaping
example
VCI
VPI
warranty
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
note
WDS
compatibility
example
web configurator
login
passwords
WEP
WEP Encryption
WEP encryption
WEP key
Wi-Fi Protected Access
wireless client WPA supplicants
Wireless Distribution System, see WDS
wireless LAN
authentication
BSS
example
channel
encryption
example
fragmentation threshold
limitations
MAC address filter
MBSSID
preamble
RADIUS server
RTS/CTS threshold
security
SSID
activation
status
WDS
compatibility
example
WEP
WPA
WPA-PSK
WPS
example
limitations
PIN
push button
wireless security
Wireless tutorial
wizard setup
Internet
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
WLAN interference
security parameters
WPA
key caching
pre-authentication
user authentication
vs WPA-PSK
wireless client supplicant
with RADIUS application example
WPA2
user authentication
vs WPA2-PSK
wireless client supplicant
with RADIUS application example
WPA2-Pre-Shared Key
WPA2-PSK
application example
WPA-PSK
application example
WPS
example
limitations
PIN
example
push button
Index
407
Index
408
VSG1432-B101 Series User’s Guide
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Key Features
- Black
- Wi-Fi 4 (802.11n) 300 Mbit/s
- Gigabit Ethernet
- Ethernet WAN DSL WAN
- Ethernet LAN (RJ-45) ports: 1
- Web-based management Quality of Service (QoS) support
Related manuals
advertisement